Toshiba 15DLV77C Service Manual

Download

Page 1

FILE NO. 810-200765GR

SERVICE MANUAL

15-inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION

15DLV77C

The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number.

This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green

product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).

For(*1) and (*2), see the next page.

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, June, 2007 GREEN

Page 2

(*1) GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.

Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this, Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products, parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.

Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.

(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER

This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in the servicing and repair of this product.

WARNING

This product is manufactured using lead free solder.

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !

The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86°F to 104°F (30°C to 40°C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product ⎯ especially when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs ⎯ as the level of heat required to melt lead-free solder is high.

Page 3

ColorStream® is a registered trademark of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

is a trademark of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

J5X00401A SH 07/05

Printed in Thailand

15-inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

COMBINATION

15DLV77C

OWNER’S MANUAL

Introduction

Connections

Basic setup

TV operation

Basic playback

Advanced playback

Function setup

Others

Introduction

The lightning  ash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN

CAUTION : TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN

WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product will

expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CAUTION:

THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS OWNER'S MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.

This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, speci es that the cable ground shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. For additional antenna grounding information, see item 17 on page 4.

The lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury. Disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).

WARNING: If you decide to wall mount this television, always use

a UL Listed wall bracket appropriate for the size and weight of this television. The use of any wall bracket other than a UL Listed wall bracket appropriate for the size and weight of this television for wall mounting this television could result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage.

OR MOISTURE.

EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.

Wash hands after handling.

NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS

ON DISPOSAL

triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product's enclosure that may be of suf cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

1. READ INSTRUCTIONS

All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

2. RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS

The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

3. HEED WARNINGS

All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

4. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS

All operating and use instructions should be followed.

5. CLEANING

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a soft dry cloth for cleaning the exterior cabinet only.

6. ATTACHMENTS

The manufacturer of this unit does not make any recommendations for attachments, as they may cause

hazards.

7. WATER AND MOISTURE

Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet

basement, or near a swimming pool.

8. ACCESSORIES

Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit. 8A. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.

9. VENTILATION

Slots and openings in the cabinet back or bottom are provided for ventilation, and to ensure reliable operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the unit

on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

10. POWER SOURCE

This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not

sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company.

11. GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION

This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will  t into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.

12. POWER-CORD PROTECTION

Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed

upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.

PORTABLE CART WARNING

(symbol provided by RETAC)

S3125A

Introduction

Page 4

Introduction

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

13. LIGHTNING

To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time,

unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the unit due to lightning and power line surges. However, if there is thunder or lightning now, do not touch the unit and any connected cable.

This will for you not to receive the electric shock by the serge of thunder.

14. POWER LINES

An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric

light or power circuits, or where it can fall onto or against such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be fatal.

15. OVERLOADING

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of  re or electric shock.

16. OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY

Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short

out parts that could result in  re or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

17. OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING

If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is

grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

(continued)

ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE

GROUND CLAMP

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810-20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

S2898A

18. SERVICING

Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous

voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to quali ed service personnel. For example: a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged. b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit. c. If the unit has been exposed to rain or water. d. If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those

controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls

may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali ed technician to restore the

unit to its normal operation. e. If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. f. When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250, PART H)

19. REPLACEMENT PARTS

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts speci ed by

the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in  re, electric shock or other hazards.

20. SAFETY CHECK

Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to

determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

21. HEAT

The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including ampli ers) that produce heat.

22. DISC SLOT

Keep your  ngers well clear of the disc slot as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.

23. CONNECTING

When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment

from the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause a product damage. Read the owner's manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.

24. HEADPHONES

When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones

continuously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.

25. LASER BEAM

Do not look into the opening of the disc slot or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the

laser beam. It may cause sight damage.

26. DISC

Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious

personal injury and product malfunction.

27. LCD

Do not press hard or jolt the LCD panel. It may cause the LCD panel glass to break and injury may occur. Should the LCD panel be broken and liquid leaks out, do not inhale or swallow it. Doing so may cause

poisoning. If you have got it into your mouth, wash it out and consult your doctor. If your hands or clothes have touched it, wipe them with alcohol and a cleaning cloth and then wash them well.

Introduction

Precautions

Notes on handling

Q Do not shock the LCD panel. It may cause unit

damage and malfunction.

Q When shipping the unit, the original shipping carton

and packing materials come in handy. For fully protection, repack the unit as it was originally packed at the factory.

Q Do not use volatile liquids, such as insect spray, near

the unit. Do not leave rubber or plastic products to contact the unit for prolonged period. They will leave marks on the  nish.

Q The top and rear panels of the unit may become

warm after a long period of use. This is not a malfunction.

Q When the unit is not in use, be sure to remove the

disc and turn off the power.

Q If you do not use the unit for a long period, the unit

may not function properly in the future. Turn on and use the unit occasionally.

Notes on LCD

The color LCD is manufactured using extremely high precision technology, but even so may include certain pixels that do not operate properly (that do not light, that remain lit constantly, etc.). We do our best to keep the number of these defective pixels to a minimum, but please understand that they cannot be completely eliminated even with the most advanced manufacturing technologies available today.

The  uorescent tube which illuminates the panel from the inside will deteriorate with use. When the LCD becomes dim,  ickers, or does not illuminate, contact your dealer for replacement.

The brightness of the LCD monitor differs slightly depending on the viewing angles. Adjust the angle to obtain the best viewing. (The recommended angle is 90 degrees to the monitor.)

Notes on locating

Q WARNING: To prevent injury, this apparatus must be

securely attached to the  oor/wall in accordance with the installation instructions.

Q When you place this unit near a TV, radio, or VCR,

the playback picture may become poor and the sound may be distorted. In this case, place the unit away from the TV, radio, or VCR.

Q To avoid damage to this product, never place or store

the unit in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; or areas

subject to excessive dust or vibration. Q Always place the TV on the  oor or a sturdy, level, stable surface that can support the weight of the unit. Use a sturdy tie between the TV’s rear hook and the rear wall, pillar, etc., to secure the TV. If you use a TV stand,  x the TV by using the attached

band.

Sturdy tie (as short as possible)

Hooks

TV side

Band

Notes on moisture condensation

Moisture condensation damages the unit. Please read the following carefully.

Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day. Drops of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way, moisture may condense on the optical pick-up lens inside this unit, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit.

Q Moisture condensation occurs during the

following cases.

When you bring the unit directly from a cold place to

a warm place.

When you use the unit in a room where you just

turned on the heater, or a place where the cold wind from the air conditioner directly hits the unit.

In summer, when you use the unit in a hot and

humid place just after you move the unit from an air conditioned room.

When you use the unit in a humid place.

Q Do not use the unit when moisture condensation

may occur.

If you use the unit in such a situation, it may damage discs and internal parts. Remove the disc, connect the power cord of the unit to the wall outlet, turn on the unit, and leave it for two or three hours. After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up and evaporated any moisture. Keep the unit connected to the wall outlet and moisture condensation will seldom occur.

Clip

Screw

Notes on cleaning

TV top

Use a soft, dry cloth for cleaning.

Do not use any type of solvent, such as thinner and

benzine, as they may damage the surface of the unit.

Wait!

Notes on discs

On handling discs

Do not touch the playback side of the disc.

For example, handle the disc so that it is shown in  gure below.

Optical pick-up

lens

Do not attach paper or tape to discs.

Playback side

On cleaning discs

Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and

sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean.

Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,

benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.

On storing discs

Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight

or near heat sources.

Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and

dust such as a bathroom or near a humidi er.

Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing

objects on discs outside of their case may cause

Wall outlet

warping.

Structure of disc contents

Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the titles are sub-divided into chapters. Video CDs and Audio CDs are divided into tracks.

DVD video disc

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3

Video CD/Audio CD

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5

Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track number” respectively. There may be discs that do not have these numbers.

DVD video disc

Title 1 Title 2

Video CD/Audio CD

Notes on copyright

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of copyrighted materials including, without limitation, television programs, videotapes, and DVDs, is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Introduction

Page 5

Introduction

Notes on discs (Continued)

About this owner’s manual

This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions of this unit. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner that allows speci c or limited operation during playback. As such, the unit may not respond to all operating command. This is not a defect in the unit. Refer to instruction notes of discs.

The following symbol may appear on the TV screen during operation.

It means that the operation is not permitted by the TV/ DVD or the disc. For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the playback of copyright message of the disc when the STOP (

) button is pressed. Alternatively, this symbol may also indicate that the feature is not available for the disc.

Notes on region numbers

The region number of this unit is 1. If region numbers, which stand for their playable area, are printed on your DVD video disc and you do not  nd playback will not be allowed by the player. (In this case, the unit will display a message on-screen.) Some DVDs that have no region code label may still be subject to area restrictions and therefore not playable.

On Video CDs

This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC (Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on types of discs.

• Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1)

Sound and movie can be played on this unit in the

same way as a DVD.

• Video CD equipped with PBC function

(Version 2.0)

In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped

with the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of the functions described in this owner’s manual may not work with some discs.

ALL

, disc

Playable discs

This unit can play the following discs.

Disc Mark Contents

DVD video discs

Video

CDs

DIGITAL VIDEO

Audio

CDs

DivX

The following discs are also available.

DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, WMA,

format

JPEG or DivX

Kodak Picture CD and FUJICOLOR CD format

Some of these discs may be incompatible.

• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.

• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, CDROM, Photo CD, etc., or non standardized discs even if they may be labeled as above.

• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.

• This unit uses the NTSC color system, and cannot play DVD video discs recorded in any other color system (PAL, SECAM, etc.).

• This unit can play an 8cm disc. Please do not use a disc adapter. It may cause trouble.

• Please do not insert any disc of an irregular shape into the unit, as it may interfere with the function of the unit. You may not be able to remove it.

• Please do not use after market accessories, such as a ring protector, as this may cause trouble with the operation of the unit.

Because of problems and errors that can occur during the creation of DVD and CD Software and/or the manufacture of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that the DVD player contained in this TV will successfully play every disc bearing the DVD and CD logos. If you happen to experience any dif culty playing a DVD and/or CD disc on the DVD player contained in this TV, please contact Toshiba Customer Service.

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing

Corporation.

Audio

Video (moving pictures)

Audio

Video (moving pictures)

Audio

Video (moving pictures)

Disc Size

12 cm

Approx. 80 minutes

8 cm

Approx. 160 minutes

Approx. 74 minutes

12 cm

Approx. 20 minutes

8 cm

Approx. 74 minutes

12 cm

Approx. 20 minutes

8 cm

12 cm

It depends on DivX®

8 cm

Maximum

playback time

Approx. 4 hours

(single sided disc)

Approx. 8 hours

(double sided disc)

(single sided disc)

(double sided disc)

(single sided disc)

quality

Contents

Introduction

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS ............................ 3

Precautions........................................................ 6

Notes on discs ................................................... 7

Contents ............................................................ 9

Identi cation of controls ................................... 10

Connections

Antenna connections ....................................... 14

Cable TV connections ..................................... 15

Connecting to optional equipment ................... 16

Power source................................................... 20

Basic setup

Setting the language........................................ 21

To memorize channels.....................................22

TV operation

TV operation .................................................... 23

Closed captions ............................................... 25

Picture control adjustment ............................... 26

Adjusting the picture mode .............................. 26

Selecting the color temperature....................... 27

Sound control adjustment ................................ 28

Stereo and Second Audio Program (SAP) ......28

Basic playback

Playing a disc ..................................................29

Advanced playback

Zooming.......................................................... 32

Locating desired scene................................... 32

Repeat playback ............................................. 33

A-B Repeat playback ...................................... 33

Program playback........................................... 34

Random playback ........................................... 34

Changing angles..............................................35

Title selection ...................................................35

DVD menu .......................................................35

Changing soundtrack language .......................36

Subtitles ...........................................................36

Disc status .......................................................37

To turn off the PBC ..........................................37

MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

and Audio CD operation ..................................38

Repeat and program playback

using  le browser.............................................42

Function setup

Customizing the function settings ....................44

Temporary cancel the rating level

by DVD disc .....................................................50

Others

Language code list ..........................................51

Troubleshooting ...............................................52

Reception disturbances ...................................54

Speci cations ..................................................55

Limited Canada Warranty ................................56

Introduction

Identi cation of controls

See the page in for details.

Top

POWER button

VOLUME ( ) buttons

CHANNEL ( / ) buttons

EJECT ( ) button

SKIP ( / ) buttons

STOP( ) button

PLAY ( ) button

Front

Speaker Speaker

Side

Adjusting the angle of the base

Approx. 15° Approx. 5°

Introduction

Left Side Right Side

PHONES jack

AUDIO IN (L/R)

/VIDEO IN

(LINE 2 IN) jacks

S-VIDEO jack

Disc slot

You can adjust the angle of the TV-screen for 5° forward or for 15° backward from vertical angle. Hold the base of the TV while adjusting the angle.

Rear

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack

Remote sensor

POWER indicator

Antenna jack

DC input jack

VIDEO IN (LINE 1 IN) jack

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

B, PR) (LINE 1 IN) jacks

(Y, P

AUDIO IN (L/R) (LINE 1 IN) jacks

Page 6

Introduction

Identi cation of controls (Continued)

Remote control

The instructions in this manual describe the function on the remote control. See the page in for details.

Inserting batteries

Open the battery compartment

cover in the direction of the arrow.

Install two “R03/AAA” batteries

(supplied), paying attention to the polarity indicated in the battery compartment.

Replace the compartment cover.

Introduction

EJECT button

TV/DVD button

Direct channel selection buttons (0

Numbered buttons (0

RECALL button

INPUT SELECT button

PLAY MODE button

TOP MENU button

SETUP button

SLOW buttons

ANGLE button AUDIO button

*DVD MENU button

Use the DVD MENU button to display the menu included on many DVD video discs. To operate a menu, follow the instructions in “DVD menu.”

Connections

JUMP button

GAME button

MENU button

PLAY button

STOP button

SKIP buttons

REV button

FWD button

35 40

21 44

29 29 31 31 31 31

35 36

POWER button SLEEP button

CH RTN button ZOOM button

MUTE button VOL +/- buttons

CANCEL button

*DVD MENU button

Direction buttons CH +/

ENTER button

RETURN button

PAUSE button

CLOSED CAPTION button REPEAT A-B button

SUBTITLE button

buttons

21 32

35 40

( / / / )

Operation

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to operate.

• Operate the remote control within 30° angle on either side of the remote sensor, up to a distance of approx. 5 meters.

Approx. 5 meters

Caution:

• Never throw batteries into a  re.

Notes:

•

Be sure to use AAA size batteries.

• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.

Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with

•

applicable laws and regulations.

• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with

new ones.

• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones. Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in combination.

• Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an

extended period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

Antenna connections

If you are using an indoor or outdoor antenna, follow the instructions below that correspond to your antenna system. If you are using a cable TV service (CABLE), see page 15 for Cable TV connections.

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Single 75 ohm cable or 300 ohm twin-lead wire)

Antenna

jack

75 ohm coaxial cable (not supplied)

Antenna

jack

300-75 ohm matching transformer (supplied)

Connect the 75 ohm cable from the combination VHF/UHF antenna to the antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

If your combination VHF/UHF antenna has a 300 ohm twin-lead wire, use the 300-75 ohm matching transformer.

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Separate VHF and UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wires)

Antenna

jack

Combiner (not supplied)

UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire (not supplied)

300-75 ohm matching transformer (supplied)

VHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire (not supplied)

Connect the UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the combiner (not supplied). Connect the VHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the 300-75 ohm matching transformer. Attach the transformer to the combiner, then attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

Separate VHF/UHF antennas (75 ohm VHF cable and 300 ohm UHF twin-lead wires)

Antenna

jack

Combiner (not supplied)

UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire (not supplied)

VHF 75 ohm (not supplied)

Connect the VHF 75 ohm cable and UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the combiner (not supplied). Attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

Cable TV connections

This TV/DVD has an extended tuning range and can tune most cable channels without using a Cable TV converter box. Some cable companies offer “premium pay channels” in which the signal is scrambled. Descrambling these signals for normal viewing requires the use of a descrambler device which is generally provided by the cable company.

For subscribers to basic cable TV service

For basic cable service not requiring a converter/descrambler box, connect the Cable TV 75 ohm coaxial cable directly to the Antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

75 ohm coaxial cable

Antenna

jack

For subscribers to scrambled cable TV service

If you subscribe to a cable TV service which requires the use of a converter/descrambler box, connect the incoming 75 ohm coaxial cable to the converter/descrambler box. Using another 75 ohm coaxial cable, connect the output jack of the converter/descrambler box to the antenna jack on the TV/DVD. Follow the connections shown below. Set the TV/DVD to the output channel of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the converter/descrambler box to select channels.

Incoming 75 ohm Cable TV

For subscribers to unscrambled basic cable TV service with scrambled premium channels

If you subscribe to a cable TV service in which basic channels are unscrambled and premium channels require the use of a converter/descrambler box, you may wish to use a signal splitter and an A/B Switch box (available from the cable company or an electronics supply store). Follow the connections shown below. With the switch in the “B” position, you can directly tune any nonscrambled channels on your TV/DVD. With the switch in the “A” position, tune your TV/DVD to the output of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the converter/descrambler box to tune scrambled channels.

Incoming 75 ohm Cable TV

Splitter

Converter/

descrambler

Converter/

descrambler

A/B switch

75 ohm cable to TV/DVD

Antenna

jack

Antenna

jack

Connections

Page 7

Connections

Connecting to optional equipment

You can enjoy VCR, camcorder or TV game with connection to external input.

INPUT SELECT

GAME

Using the audio/video inputs

Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select the desired mode. “VIDEO1”, “VIDEO2”, “ColorStream” or TV channel will display on the screen for 4 seconds.

TV Channel VIDEO1

(Rear lower left)

Note: This key will not operate in DVD mode.

ColorStream

VIDEO2

(Left side)

VIDEO1

Connecting to a VCR

To playback from the VCR, connect the VCR to the TV/DVD as shown. Select the “VIDEO2” by pressing INPUT SELECT repeatedly.

: Signal  ow

Note: Picture might be muted for some VCR playback. This is not a malfunction of this unit.

VCR

To Audio/Video OUT

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

(white)

(yellow)

(red)

Left side (LINE 2 IN)

To AUDIO(L/R)/VIDEO IN

The LINE 1 IN terminals can be used in the same way.

Connecting to a camcorder

To playback from the camcorder, connect the camcorder to the TV/DVD as shown. Select the “VIDEO2” by pressing INPUT SELECT repeatedly.

: Signal  ow

Camcorder

To Audio/Video OUT

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

(red)

(white)

(yellow)

Left side (LINE 2 IN)

To AUDIO(L/R)/VIDEO IN

The LINE 1 IN terminals can be used in the same way.

Connecting to a TV Game

You can enjoy playing a TV game on the screen by adjusting to suitable brightness for your eyes.

1. Connect a TV Game to the TV/DVD.

2. Select the “GAME” by pressing GAME. The GAME mode screen appears.

• This TV/DVD has the GAME mode function (see page 24).

: Signal  ow

To Audio/Video OUT

Notes:

• You can also change the TV screen to the desired mode by pressing the CH +/– buttons.

• The TV/DVD can also be used as a display device for many video games. However, due to the wide variety of different types of signal generated by these devices and subsequent hook-up variations required, they have not all been included in the suggested connection diagrams. You’ll need to consult each component’s Owner’s Manual for additional information.

• Interactive video games that involve shooting a “gun” type of joystick at on-screen target may not work on this TV/DVD.

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

(white)

(yellow)

(red)

Left side (LINE 2 IN)

To AUDIO(L/R)/VIDEO IN

Only the LINE 2 IN terminals can be used with the GAME mode.

Connecting to an optional equipment with S-video output

If you connect a VCR with an S-VIDEO cable to the S-VIDEO IN jack on the left side of the TV/DVD, you must also connect the audio cables to the AUDIO IN (LINE 2 IN) jacks on the left side of the TV/DVD. The S-VIDEO cable only carries the video signal. The audio signal is separate. Select the “VIDEO2” by pressing INPUT SELECT repeatedly.

: Signal  ow

Ex. VCR with S-Video

To AUDIO (L/R) IN

Left side (LINE 2 IN)

(red)

(white)

(playback)

To S-VIDEO OUT

Note: When the S-VIDEO cable and the standard video cable are connected at the same time, the S-video cable takes precedence.

To Audio (L/R) OUT

Audio cable (not supplied)

S-Video cable (not supplied)

To S-VIDEO IN

Connecting an optional equipment with ColorStream® (Component video) output

Your TV/DVD is capable of using ColorStream® (component video). Connecting your TV/DVD to a component video compatible DVD player, such as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream quality and performance.

Q Selecting Component input mode Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to

Notes:

• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the unit to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet

• If you place the unit near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the unit away from the

Ex. DVD player with Component video

: Signal  ow

To Component Video OUT

select “ColorStream” mode.

ColorStream

The ColorStream® inputs on this unit are for use with devices that output 480i interlaced signals and 480p progressive signals. This unit will not accept or display 720p progressive scan signals or 1080i interlaced high-de nition signals. If you connect a highde nition set-top receiver, 720p progressive scan DVD player, or other similar device to the unit’s ColorStream SWITCH THE DEVICE’S OUTPUT TO 480i INTERLACED OR 480p PROGRESSIVE MODE FIRST. Failure to do this will cause a poor or no picture to display.

before making any connections.

tuner and radio.

To AUDIO (L/R) IN

To Audio OUT

Audio cable (not supplied)

Component video cable (not supplied)

When using the Component video cable, an Audio cable must be connected to AUDIO IN (L/R) (LINE 1 IN) jacks.

can greatly enhance picture

Rear lower right of the TV

To COMPONENT (Y, P

B, PR) IN

inputs, YOU MUST

Connections

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)

You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds by connecting the TV/DVD to optional audio equipment.

* This section uses the following reference mark.

: Front speaker : Rear speaker : Sub woofer

: Center speaker : Signal  ow

Connecting to an ampli er equipped with a Dolby® Digital decoder

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is now available to reproduce this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital recording system with this dynamic realistic sound by connecting the TV/DVD to a 6 channel ampli er equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Surround Pro Logic decoder, you will obtain the full bene t of Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks, as well as from titles with the Dolby Surround mark.

Ampli er equipped with a

Dolby Digital decoder

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

75 : coaxial cable (not supplied)

AUDIO OUT

Rear lower left of the TV

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Connecting to an ampli er equipped with a Dolby Surround Pro Logic

Dolby Surround Pro Logic

You can enjoy the dynamic realistic sound of Dolby Surround Pro Logic by connecting an ampli er and speaker system (right and left front speakers, a center speaker, and one or two rear speakers).

Q With an ampli er equipped with a Dolby Digital Connect the equipment the same way as described in “Connecting to an ampli er equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder.” Refer to that ampli er’s owner’s manual and set the ampli er so that you can enjoy Dolby Surround Pro Logic sound.

Q With an ampli er not equipped with a Dolby Digital Connect the equipment as follows.

• This connection is only suitable for Video CDs and Audio CDs.

Ampli er equipped with a

Dolby Surround Pro Logic

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

75 : coaxial cable (not supplied)

To COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

Rear lower left of the TV

* Connect one or two rear speakers. The output sound from the rear speakers will be monaural even if you connect two rear speakers.

Connecting to an ampli er equipped with a DTS® decoder

Digital Theater Systems (DTS)

DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use, on DVD video discs or audio CDs. If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full bene t of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD video discs or audio CDs.

Ampli er equipped with

a DTS decoder

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

75 : coaxial cable (not supplied)

Rear lower left of the TV

To COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Connecting to an ampli er equipped with an MPEG audio decoder

MPEG2 sound

You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system with dynamic realistic sound by connecting an ampli er equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.

Ampli er equipped with an

MPEG2 audio decoder

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

75 : coaxial cable (not supplied)

Rear lower left of the TV

To COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

Connecting to an ampli er equipped with a digital audio input

2 channel digital stereo

You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an ampli er equipped with a digital audio input and speaker system (right and left front speakers). Note: PCM audio is limited to DVD or CD playback.

Ampli er equipped with a

Digital audio input

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

Notes:

• DO NOT connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital Receiver. This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD.

• Connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.

• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the TV/DVD to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet before making any connections.

• The output sound of the TV/DVD has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver’s volume to a moderate listening level. Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.

• Turn off the ampli er before you connect or disconnect the TV/DVD’s power cord. If you leave the ampli er’s power on, the speakers may be damaged.

75 : coaxial cable (not supplied)

Rear lower left of the TV

To COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

Connections

Page 8

Connections

Basic setup

Power source

Power connection

AC 120V,

To DC input jack

TO USE AC POWER

1. Connect the AC cord to the AC adapter.

2. Connect the AC adapter plug into the TV/DVD’s DC input jack.

3. Connect the AC cord into a wall outlet.

Notes:

• Make sure to insert the plug of each cord securely.

• During use the AC adapter becomes warm. This is not a malfunction.

WARNING:

• DO NOT CONNECT THIS UNIT TO THE POWER USING ANY DEVICE OTHER THAN THE SUPPLIED AC ADAPTER OR POWER CORD. THIS COULD CAUSE FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR DAMAGE.

• DO NOT USE WITH A VOLTAGE OTHER THAN THE POWER VOLTAGE DISPLAYED. THIS COULD CAUSE FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR DAMAGE.

CAUTION:

• DO NOT USE THE AC ADAPTER IF IT IS COVERED BY A CLOTH ETC., OR PRESSED INTO A NARROW AREA.

THIS RESULTS IN POOR DISSIPATION OF HEAT AND MAY CAUSE FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR DAMAGE.

• WHEN THIS UNIT IS NOT USED FOR AN EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME, (E.G., AWAY ON A TRIP) IN THE INTEREST OF SAFETY, BE SURE TO UNPLUG IT FROM THE WALL OUTLET.

• DO NOT PLUG/UNPLUG THE PLUG WHEN YOUR HANDS ARE WET. THIS MAY CAUSE ELECTRIC SHOCK.

• IF YOU NEED TO REPLACE THE SUPPLIED AC ADAPTER OR AC CORD, THE SPECIFIED AC ADAPTER AND AC CORD MUST BE USED. CONTACT THE DEALER THAT YOU PURCHASED THE UNIT FROM.

AC adapter (supplied)

60Hz

AC cord (supplied)

Setting the language

This TV/DVD can display the on screen language in English, Spanish or French in the TV mode. Select the language you prefer  rst, then proceed with the other menu options.

Setting the language

To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.

The Power indicator on the front of the main unit

will light.

Press MENU and then press or to select

“SETUP”.

Press or to select “LANGUAGE”, then press

or to select the desired language:

English (ENGLISH), Spanish (ESPAÑOL) or French (FRANÇAIS), then press ENTER.

Press CANCEL to clear the menu screen.

CANCEL

Notes:

• If the unit does not operate properly, or No key operation (by the unit and/or the remote control): Static electricity,

etc., may affect the TV/DVD’s operation. In such case, disconnect the AC cord once, then connect it again.

• The TV section has its own menu and also DVD section has its own menu

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

SETUP

ENGLISH

LANGUAGE

CABLE

TV/CABLE CH PROGRAM

ADD

ADD/ERASE

OFF

CLOSED CAPTION

:SELECT :ADJUST

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

SETUP

ENGLISH

LANGUAGE ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL

CABLE

TV/CABLE CH PROGRAM

ADD

ADD/ERASE

OFF

CLOSED CAPTION

:SELECT :ADJUST

POWER

CANCEL ENTER

/ / /

Basic setup

To memorize channels

This TV/DVD is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory, skipping over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must be programmed into the TV/DVD’s memory. In addition to normal VHF and UHF channels, this TV/DVD can receive up to 113 Cable TV channels. To use this TV/DVD with an antenna, set the TV/CABLE selection to the TV position. When shipped from the factory, this selection is in the CABLE position.

TV/CABLE selection

Press MENU in the TV mode, then press or to select SETUP.

Press or to select “TV/CABLE”.

Press or to select “TV” or “CABLE”.

TV - VHF/UHF channels CABLE - Cable TV channels

Press CANCEL to clear the menu screen.

CANCEL

Cable TV chart

The chart below is typical of many cable system channel allocations.

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

SETUP

LANGUAGE

TV/CABLE CH PROGRAM ADD/ERASE CLOSED CAPTION

:SELECT :ADJUST

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

SETUP

LANGUAGE

TV/CABLE

CH PROGRAM ADD/ERASE CLOSED CAPTION

:SELECT :ADJUST

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

SETUP

LANGUAGE

TV/CABLE

CH PROGRAM ADD/ERASE CLOSED CAPTION

:SELECT :ADJUST

ENGLISH

CABLE

ADD OFF

ENGLISH

TV/CABLE

ADD OFF

ENGLISH

TV/CABLE

ADD OFF

0–9

CANCEL

/ / /

CH +/– MENU

Automatic memory tuning

Press MENU, then press or to select SETUP.

or to select the “CH PROGRAM”, then

Press press

The TV will begin memorizing all the channels available in your area.

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

SETUP

LANGUAGE

TV/CABLE

CH PROGRAM

ADD/ERASE CLOSED CAPTION

:SELECT :ADJUST

ENGLISH

CABLE

ADD OFF

To ADD/ERASE channels

Select the desired channel to be added or deleted using Direct

CH +/–.

Press MENU, then press SETUP. Press

Press or to select “ADD” or “ERASE”.

Press CANCEL to clear the menu screen. Repeat steps 1 ~ 3 to add or erase other channel.

CANCEL

channel selection (0–9) or

or to select “ADD/ERASE”.

to select

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

SETUP

LANGUAGE

TV/CABLE CH PROGRAM

ADD/ERASE

CLOSED CAPTION

:SELECT :ADJUST

ENGLISH

CABLE

ADD/ERASE

OFF

TV operation

POWER

0–9

VOL +/–

TV operation

To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.

The Power indicator on the front of the main unit

will light.

Adjust the volume level by pressing VOL + or

The volume level will be indicated on the

–.

screen by white bars. As the volume level increases, so do the number of bars. If the volume decreases, the number of white bars also decreases.

VOLUME 32

Set the TV/CABLE selection to the appropriate

position.

Auto power off

If a station being viewed stops broadcasting, the TV will automatically shut itself off after 15 minutes.

TV - VHF/UHF channels CABLE

- Cable TV channels

Press direct channel selection (0–9) to select the channel.

TV mode direct channel selection

When the TV/CABLE selection is in the TV position, all channels can be instantly selected by using two buttons. (for example, to select channel 2, press “0”, then “2”. If you press only “2”, channel selection will be delayed for a few seconds.) For channels 10 and above, press the 2 digits in order.

CABLE mode direct channel selection

When the TV/CABLE selection is in the CABLE position, channels can be selected as follows: TO SELECT CABLE TV CHANNELS: 1-9: Press “0” twice, then 1-9 as needed. Example, to select channel 2, press “002”. 10-12: Press “0”, then the remaining 2 digits. Example, to select channel 12, press “012”. 13-99: Press the 2 digits in order. Example, to select channel 36, press “36”. 100-125: Press the 3 digits in order. Example, to select channel 120, press “120”.

NOTE FOR CHANNELS 1-12:

If only 1 or 2 buttons are pressed, the corresponding channel will be selected in 2 seconds.

Note:

If a channel with no broadcast is selected, the sound will automatically be muted.

VHF 2-13 UHF

14-69

CATV

VHF 2-13

STD/HRC/IRC

14-36

(A) (W)

37-59

(AA) (WW)

60-85

(AAA) (ZZZ)

86-94

(86) (94)

95-99

(A-5) (A-1)

100-125

(100) (125)

(5A)

TV operation

ANT

Page 9

TV operation

TV operation (Continued)

TV operation

Q CHANNEL UP/DOWN

Press and release CH + or –. The channel automatically stops at the next channel set into memory. For proper operation, before selecting channels, they should be set into the memory. See page 22 “To memorize channels”.

ANT

Q RECALL

Press RECALL to display the current informations on the screen. Press RECALL again to clear the display.

• Channel number or external input mode

• Stereo or SAP (Second Audio Program) audio status

Q CH RETURN

This button allows you to go back to the last channel selected by pressing CH RTN. Press CH RTN again to return to the last channel you were watching.

Q MUTE

Press MUTE to switch off the sound. The TV/DVD’s sound will be silenced and “MUTE” will appear brie y on the screen. The sound can be switched back on by pressing this button again or one of VOL +/–.

STEREO SAP

ANT

SLEEP

RECALL CH RTN MUTE VOL +/–

GAME CH +/–

Q SLEEP To set the TV/DVD to turn off after a preset amount of time, press SLEEP on the remote control. The clock will count up 10 minutes for each press of SLEEP (0h00m, 0h10m,... 1h50m, 2h00m). After the sleep time is programmed, the display will appear brie y every ten minutes to remind you that the sleep timer is operating. To con rm the sleep timer setting, press SLEEP and the remaining time will be displayed for a few seconds. To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP repeatedly until the display turns to 0h00m.

SLEEP

0h00m

Q GAME MODE

After connecting a TV Game to the unit (see page 16), press GAME. The TV screen changes to the Game mode.

GAME

• The Game mode screen is adjusted to the suitable brightness for your eyes.

• If GAME is pressed during standby mode, the unit turns on automatically and the Game mode screen appears on the screen.

• Interactive video games that involve shooting a “gun” type of joy-stick at an on-screen target may not work on this TV/DVD.

Q HEADPHONES

Insert a stereo headphones (not supplied) with a 1/8” mini plug into the HEAD PHONES jack on the front panel. If you connect headphones, the sound from TV speakers is muted.

Closed captions

WHAT IS CLOSED CAPTIONING?

This television has the capability to decode and display closed captioned television programs. Closed captioning will display text on the screen for hearing impaired viewers or it will translate and display text in another language.

CLOSED CAPTION

Closed captions

Captions: This closed caption mode will display text on the screen in English or another language

(depending on the setting of the closed captions CH 1/2). Generally, closed captions in English are transmitted on captions channel 1 and closed captions in other languages are transmitted on captions channel 2.

Text: The text closed caption mode will usually  ll the screen with a programming schedule or other information. After selecting a closed caption mode, it will stay in effect until it is changed, even if the channel is changed. If the captions signal is lost due to a commercial or a break in the signal, the captions will reappear when the signal is received again. If the channels are changed, the captions will be delayed approximately 10 seconds. The captions will appear in places on the screen where they will least interfere with the picture, usually on the bottom of the screen. News programs will usually show three-line closed captions which scroll onto the screen. Most other shows provide two or three lined captions placed near the character who is speaking so the viewer can follow the dialogue. Words in italics or underlined describe titles, words in foreign languages or words requiring emphasis. Words that are sung usually appear enclosed by musical notes. For television programs broadcasting with closed captions, look in your TV guide for the closed captions symbol (CC).

TO VIEW CLOSED CAPTIONS

Press CLOSED CAPTION to switch between normal TV and the two closed caption modes (captions and full screen text). Closed captioning will display text on the screen for hearing impaired viewers.

• You can also select the closed captions in SETUP menu in the TV mode.

Notes:

• When selecting closed captions, the captioning will be delayed approximately 10 seconds.

• If no caption signal is received, no captions will appear, but the television will remain in the caption mode.

• Misspellings or unusual characters may occasionally appear during closed captioning. This is normal with closed captioning, especially with live programs. This is because during live programs, captions are also entered live. These transmissions do not allow time for editing.

• When captions are being displayed, on-screen displays, such as volume and mute may not be seen or may interfere with closed captions.

• Some cable systems and copy protection systems may interfere with the closed captioned signal.

• If using an indoor antenna or if TV reception is very poor, the closed caption decoder may not appear or may appear with strange characters or misspelled words. In this case, adjust the antenna for better reception or use an outdoor antenna.

CLOSED CAPTION OFF

TV operation

MUTE

TV operation

Picture control adjustment/ Adjusting the picture mode

Picture controls are factory preset but you can adjust them individually as follows: And also you can select four picture modes—Standard, Sports, Movie, and Memory—as described in the following table:

Picture control adjustment Adjusting the picture mode

Press MENU and then press or to select “PICTURE”.

Press or to select the item you want to adjust, then press

Selection Pressing

BRIGHTNESS darker lighter CONTRAST lower higher COLOR paler deeper TINT reddish greenish SHARPNESS softer sharper

Note:

The CONTRAST default setting is set to maximum (+50) at the factory.

Press CANCEL to clear the menu screen.

CANCEL

Q To return all adjustments to the factory preset levels

Press

or to select “RESET”, then press .

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

PICTURE

SPORTS

MODE

BRIGHTNESS

CONTRAST

COLOR

TINT

SHARPNESS

:SELECT :ADJUST

or to adjust the setting.

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

PICTURE

SPORTS

MODE

BRIGHTNESS

CONTRAST

COLOR

TINT

SHARPNESS

:SELECT :ADJUST

Press MENU and then press or to select “PICTURE”.

Press or to select “MODE”, then press

or to select the desired picture mode.

Mode Picture quality

SPORTS Bright and dynamic picture (factory-set) STANDARD Standard picture quality (factory-set) MOVIE Movie-like picture setting (factory-set) MEMORY Your personal preferences (set by you;

see “Picture control adjustment” as left)

Press CANCEL to clear the menu screen.

CANCEL

Note:

You cannot select “MODE” in the Game mode.

CANCEL

/ / /

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

PICTURE

SPORTS

MODE

BRIGHTNESS

CONTRAST

COLOR

TINT

SHARPNESS

:SELECT :ADJUST

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

PICTURE

SPORTS

MODE SPORTS/STANDARD/MOVIE/MEMORY

BRIGHTNESS

CONTRAST

COLOR

TINT

SHARPNESS

:SELECT :ADJUST

Selecting the color temperature

Press MENU and then press or to select “PICTURE”

Press or to select “COLOR TEMPERATURE”.

Press or to select the desired color mode.

Mode Picture quality

COOL Bluish MEDIUM Neutral WARM Reddish

Press CANCEL to clear the menu screen.

CANCEL

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

PICTURE

SPORTS

MODE

BRIGHTNESS

CONTRAST

COLOR

TINT

SHARPNESS

:SELECT :ADJUST

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

PICTURE

COLOR

COOL

TEMPERATURE COOL/MEDIUM/WARM

RESET

:SELECT :ADJUST

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

PICTURE

COLOR

WARM

TEMPERATURE COOL/MEDIUM/WARM

RESET

:SELECT :ADJUST

CANCEL

/ / /

TV operation

Note:

You cannot select “COLOR TEMPERATURE” in the Game mode.

Page 10

TV operation

Basic playback

Sound control adjustment/ Stereo and Second Audio Program (SAP)

Sound controls are factory preset but you can adjust them individually as follows:

The TV/DVD is equipped with a feature known as multi-channel TV sound or MTS. MTS broadcasts greatly enhance TV viewing by bringing you programs with high  delity stereo sound. MTS also provides an extra channel called the Second Audio Program or SAP which broadcasters can use to transmit a second language for bilingual transmission or for other purposes.

Sound control adjustment

Press MENU and then press or to select “AUDIO”.

Press or to select the item you want to adjust, then press

MTS

or to select “STR” (STEREO), “SAP” or

Press “MONO”.

BASS:

or to adjust the bass sound.

Press

TREBLE:

Press

or to adjust the treble sound.

BALANCE:

or to obtain an equal sound level from

Press both speakers.

SURROUND:

or to select “ON” or “OFF”.

Press

ON:

The dynamic presence and sound created offers a thoroughly enjoyable listening experience.

OFF: Normal sound.

Press CANCEL to clear the menu screen.

CANCEL

Q To return BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE control

adjustments to the factory preset levels

Press

or to select “RESET”, then press .

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

AUDIO

MTS BASS TREBLE BALANCE SURROUND RESET

:SELECT :ADJUST

or to adjust the setting.

PICTURE AUDIO SETUP

AUDIO

MTS

BASS

TREBLE BALANCE SURROUND RESET

:SELECT :ADJUST

STEREO 25 25

OFF

STEREO

OFF

Listening to stereo sound

Repeat step 1 in “Sound control adjustment” on left, then press Then press When the TV is turned on or a channel selection is made, the “STEREO” will appear on the screen. This means that Stereo broadcasting is available. You can enjoy stereo sound from the left and right speakers.

• When mono broadcasting is received, no indication is

displayed.

• If the broadcast signal is not strong enough or clear

stereo sound is not available, select “MONO”.

The noise may be eliminated.

Listening to SAP (Second Audio Program)

Repeat step 1 in “Sound control adjustment” on left, then press Then press When the TV is turned on or a channel selection is made, the “SAP” will appear on the screen. This means that the Second Audio Program broadcasting is available.

or to select “MTS”.

or to select “STR”.

STEREO

or to select “MTS”.

or to select “SAP”.

STEREO SAP

CANCEL

/ / /

Playing a disc

This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.

CAUTION

Keep your  ngers well clear of the disc slot when disc is loading or unloading. Neglecting to do so may cause serious personal injury.

DVD VCD

Basic playback

Preparations:

• When connecting to other equipment, turn the power off.

Press POWER on the unit or on the remote control to turn on the unit.

The Power indicator on the front of the main unit will light.

• Every time you press POWER, the TV/DVD starts

from TV mode.

• When using an ampli er, switch on the ampli er.

Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD mode.

The DVD startup screen will appear on the screen.

Load a disc in the disc slot.

Load the disc in the disc slot with the label side facing forward. (If the disc has a label.) Hold the disc without touching either of its surfaces, align it with the guides, and place it in position.

POWER

VOLUME

On the TV-screen, “ then playback commences.

A menu screen will appear on the TV screen if the disc has a menu feature. Press

/ or / to select title, then press

ENTER. Title is selected and play commences.

Press VOLUME + or – to adjust the volume.

Press STOP to end playback.

Q To start playback in the stop mode

Press PLAY.

PLAY STOP EJECT

/–

” changes to “Reading” and

Reading

VOLUME 32

Q Resuming facility

• The unit records the stopped point, depending on the disc.

” appears on the screen.

“

Press PLAY to resume playback (from the scene point).

• If you press STOP again

(“Q” appears on the screen.),

the unit will clear the stopped point.

Basic playback

Playing a disc (Continued)

To obtain a higher quality picture

Occasionally, some picture noise may appear on the TV screen while playing a

DVD video disc because the high resolution pictures on these discs include a lot of information. In such case, you may reduce the SHARPNESS with the Picture control adjustment menu (see page 26).

DVD VCD CD

About

DVD VCD CD

The function described under that heading.

: You can use this function with DVD video discs.

VCD

: You can use this function with Video CDs.

: You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.

DVD VCD

Basic playback

To pause playback (still mode)

Press PAUSE during playback.

To stop playback

Press STOP.

Notes:

• If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen

according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again (see pages 8 and 48).

• Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.

• When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (ie. the wrong way up), “Reading” will appear on the display for a few

minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.

• Some discs may not work the resuming facility.

• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC, see page 37.

• Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally  xed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according

to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs.

• Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.

• Use the EJECT button to unload and eject the disc.

• Do not put any objects other than discs on the disc slot. Doing so may cause the unit to malfunctions.

• There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.

icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the

To resume normal playback, press PLAY.

• The sound is muted during still mode.

To remove the disc

Press EJECT.

Remove the disc after the disc comes out.

POWER TV/DVD

EJECT

VOL +/–

ENTER

/ / /

PAUSE PLAY STOP

Note: If the unit does not operate properly:

Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD’s operation. In such case, disconnect the AC cord, then connect it again.

REV

PLAY PAUSE FWD SKIP

SLOW /

DVD VCD

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions

Press REV or FWD during playback.

REV: Fast reverse playback FWD: Fast forward playback

Each time you press REV or FWD button, the playback speed changes.

DVD

Playing frame by frame

VCD

Press PAUSE during still playback.

DVD VCD

Press SLOW (REVERSE) or (FORWARD) during playback.

DVD VCD CD

Press SKIP or repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want.

Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.

Note:

A “Prohibition” symbol “” may appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not available on the disc, or the TV/DVD cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the TV/DVD.

Each time you press PAUSE, the picture advances one frame.

Playing in slow-motion

Each time you press the button, the slow-motion speed changes.

Locating a chapter or track

To locate succeeding chapters or tracks.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Notes:

• The TV/DVD mutes sound during reverse and forward scan of DVD and Video CD discs. However, the TV/DVD plays sound during fast forward or fast reverse play of audio CDs.

• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Note:

The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Notes:

• The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.

• The Video CD cannot play Reverse Slow.

Playback starts from the beginning of the current chapter or track. When you press twice in quick successions, playback starts from the beginning of the preceding chapter or track.

Basic playback

Page 11

Advanced playback

Zooming/Locating desired scene

DVD VCD

Zooming

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.

Press ZOOM during playback.

Notes:

• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the zoom mode.

• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.

The center part of the image will be zoomed in. Each press of ZOOM will change the ZOOM

1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5)

3 (x 2.0).

and

Press / / / to view a different part of the frame.

You may move the frame from the center position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT direction.

In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a 1:1 view (

Off).

0–9

ZOOM JUMP CANCEL ENTER

/ / /

RECALL

DVD VCD

Locating desired scene

Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and track are used to locate the desired point to playback. To check the title, chapter/track and time, press RECALL.

Press JUMP during playback or resume stop mode.

Press or to select the “Time”, “Title/ Track” or “Chapter”.

Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.

• If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.

• Refer to the package supplied with the disc to check the numbers.

Press ENTER. Playback starts.

Note:

In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does not work. To turn off PBC, see page

• When you change the title, playback starts from Chapter 1 of the selected title.

• Some discs may not work in the above operation.

Jump

Title Chapter Time

Jump

Title Chapter Time

Jump

Title Chapter 12 Time

Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback

DVD

Repeat playback

VCD

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.

[DVD] Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Chapter”

or “Title”.

[Video CD] Press Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or “All”.

• If you set the repeat mode during stop mode, press PLAY to start Repeat playback.

[Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD] Please see “Repeat playback (CD)”

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

Notes:

• Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat function is prohibited during playback.

• Chapter/Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP

or is pressed.

to select “Repeat”.

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after  nishing the current title or chapter.

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after  nishing the current track.

Play Mode

Mode : Off

Repeat : Off

DVD VCD

A-B Repeat playback

A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat a section between two selected points.

Press REPEAT A-B during playback.

Press REPEAT A-B again.

To resume normal playback

Press REPEAT A-B again.

“

Notes:

• In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations may not be displayed.

• You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include multiple angles.

• A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback is activated.

• You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during certain scenes of the DVD.

• A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD, MP3/ WMA/JPEG CD.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.

PLAY MODE

ENTER

PLAY SKIP / REPEAT A-B

The start point is selected.

The end point is selected. Playback starts at the point that you selected. Playback stops at the end point and returns to Point A automatically, then starts again.

” appears on the screen.

Off

Advanced playback

Program playback/Random playback

You can arrange the playback order of tracks or  les on the disc. And the unit can also select tracks or  les at random and playback them. These feature works for Video CD.

For Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD, please see “Random playback

and “Program playback (CD)” 43.

(CD)”

VCD

Program playback

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

Press or to select “Mode”, then press ENTER repeatedly to select “Program”.

Press / to select the programming position. Press

buttons (0–9) to input the track.

VCD

Random playback

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.

Press / to select “Mode”, then press ENTER to select “Random”.

Play Mode

Mode : Off

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Play Mode

Mode : Program

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

/ and then use Number

• To program others, repeat step 3.

• If you input a wrong number, press

CANCEL.

Play Mode

Mode : Program Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Play Mode

Mode : Random

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

---

Q To change the program

1. Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press

2. Press Number buttons (0–9) to overwrite the new

Q To clear the program one by one Select Mode to “Program”, press

Q To clear all the programs At the left column, press

1 9

Notes:

---

• In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set

• The program is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the

Press PLAY

The Random Playback will start.

---

Note:

In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random function during playback.

0–9

CANCEL PLAY MODE

V/W/ ENTER

PLAY

Press / to return to the left column, then

/ to select the “Program Playback”

press and press ENTER.

The programs you selected will start to playback in order.

• To resume normal playback, select Mode: “Off” in step 2.

Play Mode

Mode : Program Repeat : Off

Program Playback

to select the track/ le number you want to change, then press CANCEL.

track/ le number.

track number. Then press CANCEL.

Then press ENTER.

Program playback.

power off.

• If you set “Random” during playback mode, Random playback will begin after the track/ le that is currently being played has ended.

• To resume normal playback,

select Mode: “Off” in step 2.

/ to select “Clear Program”.

1 9 2 3 3 11

/ / /

/ / / to select the

Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu

TOP MENU DVD MENU

V/W/

ENTER

PLAY

ANGLE

Changing angles

When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.

Press ANGLE during playback.

The current angle will appear.

1/2

Title selection

Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.

Press TOP MENU during playback.

1 2

Title menu appears on the screen.

Press / / / to select the desired title.

DVD menu

Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu. When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language and soundtrack language, etc. using the menu.

Press DVD MENU during playback.

The DVD menu appears on the screen.

• Press DVD MENU again to resume

playback at the scene when you pressed DVD MENU.

/ / / to select the desired item.

Press

Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is selected.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Press ENTER or PLAY.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title. Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a “menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume playback from the scene point when you press the DVD MENU button.

The playback of the selected title will start.

Press ENTER.

The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely.

Advanced playback

Page 12

Advanced playback

Changing soundtrack language/ Subtitles

SUBTITLE AUDIO

Disc status/To turn off the PBC

RECALL

PLAY MODE

ENTER

DVD

Changing soundtrack language

VCD

You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.

Press AUDIO during playback.

In case of Video CD playback

Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO.

Notes:

• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the button several times, the language is not recorded on the disc.

• The selected soundtrack language is canceled when you eject the disc. The initial default language or available language will be heard if the disc is played back again.

• If you select DTS in playing DTS-encoded disc, no sound will be heard from the TV/DVD’s speakers.

The current soundtrack language will appear.

Press AUDIO repeatedly until the desired language is selected.

• The on screen display will disappear after a few seconds.

LR L R

1/2 Eng Dolby Digital

2/2 Fre Dolby Digital

Subtitles

When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback until the desired language is selected.

To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until “Off” appears.

• The on screen display will disappear after a few seconds.

Notes:

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.

• While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when you loaded or eject the disc.

• In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not be changed immediately.

1/5 Eng

Off

DVD

Disc status

VCD

With press of RECALL, the status of the disc will appear on the screen. To cancel the display, press RECALL again.

DVD

DISC OPERATION

TITLE NO.

ANGLE NO.

AUDIO LANGUAGE A KIND OF AUDIO

Video CD

DISC OPERATION

ELAPSED TIME

DVD 00:15:25 01:41:39 Title 1/3 Chapter 2/24

1/1 Eng Dolby Digital 1/2 Eng 1/1

SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

ELAPSED TIME

VCD 00:08:32 00:51:03 Track 3/15

TRACK NO.

TOTAL TIME

CHAPTER NO.

VCD

To turn off the PBC (see page 8)

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

Press / to select “Mode”, then press ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appear.

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

Q To turn on the PBC

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly until “PBC” appear.

Note:

You can also turn off the PBC by pressing number button 1 and ENTER in the stop mode.

Mode : Off

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Play Mode

---

Advanced playback

MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation

This player can playback the MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-data which has been recorded on CD-R or CD-RW. To produce the MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive and a MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-encoding Software (not supplied). The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.

This player requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality. There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3/WMA  les). Not all recordable discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner’s manual are meant only as a guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3  les is not recommended.

You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted content. Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission.

Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD information

Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD playback

• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD is the disc that is standardized by ISO9660, its  le name must include 3-digits extension letters, “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.jpg”, “.div”, “.divx”, “.avi”.

• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

• This unit can read 600  les per disc. If one directory has more than 600  les, it reads up to 600  les, the remaining  les will be omitted.

• The unit is able to recognize up to a maximum of 50 directories per disc.

• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

• If the CD has both CDA audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®  les, only the CDA audio tracks will be played.

• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Speci cation” can be played back, the  le name is displayed (within 15 letters) on the screen. Long  le names will be condensed.

• The music  les recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.

Limitations on display

• The maximum number for display is 15 letters.

Available letters for display are the following: capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).

• Other letters than those above are replaced in hyphen.

Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

To playback MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® software that records data alphabetically or numerically.

2. Name each  le including two-digit or three-digit number (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).

3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders.

CAUTION:

• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

• The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®  les cannot be played back.

Standard, sampling frequency and the bit rate:

MP3 CD MPEG-1 Audio 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz 32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate)

The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit rate.

WMA CD WMA version 7 and 8 32kHz/48kbps, 44.1kHz/48kbps~192kbps, 48kHz/128kbps~192kbps The  le recorded by mono, 48kHz, 48 kbps is not available to this unit.

video

DivX DivX® version: DivX® 3, 4, 5, and 6 (speci cally 3.1.1, 4.1.2, 5.0.2, 5.0.5, 5.1.1, 5.2.1, 6.0 at Home Theater pro le). Audio format: MPEG1 Layer2 (MP2), MPEG1 Layer3 (MP3) Sampling frequencies: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz Bit rate: 32kbps ~ 320kbps Resolution: Max 720 x 576 (at 25fps), Max 720 x 480 (at 30fps)

Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. DivX, DivX Certi ed, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

CD must be corresponded to the ISO standardized  les.

CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording.

 les

CD in the recorded order,

CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.

 les depending on its structure.

MP3/WMA CD playback

Load a disc on which MP3 or WMA  les have been recorded in the disc slot.

A  le browser screen will appear on the screen.

Press / to select  le.

• In case the current directory includes more than 8  les, press

• To see contents in folder, select the folder and then

• The unit records the stopped point. “ ” appears

• If you press STOP again or unload the disc, the

or to scroll in the  le list.

press ENTER. To return to the parent directory, select “

Go Up ...” then press ENTER.

• When PLAY is pressed after the  le browser

displayed, playback begins automatically starting from the  rst  le. In this case, if the  rst  le is an MP3/WMA  le, only MP3/WMA  les are played back in order. If the  rst  le is a JPEG  le, the  rst JPEG  le is played back. If the  rst  le is a

 le is played back. If there is no  le at a

 rst DivX

root directory, playback does not begin automatically.

Press ENTER.

The selected  le starts playing back.

Press STOP to end playback.

on the screen. Press PLAY to resume playback (from the scene point).

unit will clear the stopped point.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

WMA-3

/MP3-2.MP3

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

WMA-3

DivX®  le, the

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

JPEG Preview

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

JPEG Preview

Select Files

TOP MENU

V/W/ / ENTER RETURN PLAY STOP

About  le menu

3/15 00:00:00

/Folder-1/WMA-11.WMA

MP3-5

MP3-6

WMA-11

WMA-12

Picture-1

Picture-2

Movie-1

Movie-2

Notes:

• The thumbnail list is displayed when the FUJICOLOR CD or the Kodak Picture CD are played. To display the  le browser, press TOP MENU.

• In the case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, WMA, JPEG and DivX selecting them from the  le browser.

• MP3 or WMA  le on the Kodak Picture CD is not recognized on this unit.

Notes:

• During MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® Playback, you cannot use JUMP and A-B Repeat functions.

• You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and Program playback forAudio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX Playback 42, 43.

Select Files

The  le type to make it display in the  le browser can be chosen.

or to highlight “Select Files” at right

1. Press

column in the  le browser.

2. Press ENTER, then press

type from the list (Music, Picture or Movie).

3. Press ENTER to add/remove check mark.

Checked  le type will be displayed in the  le browser.

4. Press RETURN to save the setting.

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Music Playing

 les, the  les are played back by

or to select  le

Advanced playback

Page 13

Advanced playback

MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation (Continued)

You can select your desired JPEG  le on the  le menu and picture menu. The selected JPEG  le is automatically adjusted to the TV screen. (When the aspect ratio of the JPEG  le is different to the TV screen, the black bar will appear at the top and bottom, or the both sides of the TV screen.)

CD CD

JPEG CD playback

Load a JPEG disc in the disc slot.

A  le browser screen

will appear on the

screen.

Press / to select the  le.

To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU.

Press

/ or / to select the desired  le.

(To return to a  le browser, press TOP MENU.)

• When PLAY is pressed after displaying the

 le browser, playback begins starting from the  rst  le. In this case,  le is a JPEG  le, the  rst JPEG  le is played back. If the  rst  le is a DivX

 le is played back.

DivX

If the  rst  le is an MP3/WMA  le, only MP3/

WMA  les are played back in order. If there is no  le at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.

Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected picture

appears on the screen.

Rotating an image

You can rotate an image by 90 degrees.

Press ANGLE during playback of the image.

”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the

“

screen.

Press STOP to end playback.

The  le browser appears on the screen. If you want to watch the other  le, repeat steps 3 ~ 4.

/Picture-01.JPG

Picture-01

Picture-02

Picture-03

Picture-04

Picture-05

Picture-06

Picture-07

Picture-08

automatically

 le, the  rst

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

JPEG Preview

W: 2048 H: 1536

if the  rst

Slide show playback

The slide show enables you to view pictures ( les) one after another automatically.

Preparation:

• Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds” or “15 Seconds”

Select your desired starting  le for the slide show in the step 3 on left.

Press ENTER or PLAY to start slide show from the selected  le.

• If you press PA USE during the slide show, the slide

show stops temporary. “ screen.

If the picture appears upside down or sideways,

press ANGLE repeatedly until it’s right side up.

“

”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the screen.

Press PLAY or SKIP

show.

• When the slide show playback  nished, the  le list

appears.

• To stop the slide show, press STOP. The  le list

appears.

Notes:

• Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG  les.

See “Zooming”

• During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B Repeat functions.

” appears brie y on the

again to resume the slide

STOP

TOP MENU DVD MENU

V/W/ / ENTER PAUSE

PLAY SKIP

ANGLE

DivX® CD playback

Load a disc on which DivX®  les have been recorded in the disc slot.

A  le browser screen will appear on the screen.

Press / to select  le.

• When PLAY has been pressed after displaying

the  le browser, playback begins automatically starting from the  rst  le. In this case, if the  rst  le is a JPEG  le, the  rst JPEG  le is played back. If the  rst  le is a

the  rst DivX

 le is an MP3/WMA  le, only MP3/WMA  le are played back in order. If there is no  le at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.

Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected DivX® movie will be played back on the screen.

Press STOP to end playback.

The  le browser appears on the

/Movie-01.DIVX

Movie-01

Movie-02

Movie-03

Movie-04

Movie-05

Movie-06

Movie-07

Movie-08

 le is played back. If the  rst

screen. If you want to watch the other  le, repeat steps 3 ~ 4.

DivX®  le,

Playing DivX® VOD content

DivX® VOD content is protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playback of content to speci c registered devices.

If the incorrect DRM  le is loaded, “Authorization

Select Files

Error This player is not

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

authorized to play this video.” will appear on the

JPEG Preview

screen. When you attempt to play

VOD, the number

DivX of plays is limited and the right message will appear on the screen. If you wish to play it, select “Yes”.

• If the number of plays goes over the limit, then “Rental Expired” will be displayed. In this case, the  le will not be played.

Notes:

• In order to play DivX need to register the unit with registration code. See page

• Depending on the recording conditions of DivX®  le, you may not be able to use FF, REV or JUMP function.

VOD content on this unit, you  rst

STOP

V/W

ENTER

PLAY

View DivX¨ VOD Rental

This rental has 5 views left.

Do you want to use one

of your 5 views now?

NoYes

Advanced playback

Repeat and program playback using  le browser

CD CD

Repeat playback (CD)

In the  le browser, press / / / to select “Repeat” during stop mode.

older-1

older-2

P3-1

P3-2

Press ENTER to select “Track” or “All”.

older-1

older-2

P3-1

P3-2

Press PLAY.

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

Notes:

• The repeat function is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.

• In case of Audio CD, the function of A-B Repeat can be used. See “A-B Repeat playback”

• Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after  nishing the current track.

is pressed.

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Select Files

Repeat :Track

Mode :Off

Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.

Note:

The Randam function is canceled when you eject the disc or

turn the power off.

V/W/ / ENTER

PLAY

SKIP /

Random playback (CD)

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

/ / / to select

In the  le browser, press “Mode” during stop mode.

Press ENTER to select “Random”.

Press PLAY.

To resume normal playback

The Random playback will start.

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Random

Program playback (CD)

In the  le browser, press / / / to select “Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.

Folder-1

Repeat :Off

Folder-2

Mode :Off

MP3-1

MP3-2

When “Edit Mode” is black color, you can mark the  les which you want to add into Program list.

Press

/ / / to select  le you want to add

into the program list.

Press ENTER. Selected  le was

Repeat this procedure to select the

Press /// to select “Add To Program”. Then press ENTER. All marked  les are added

into the program list.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

marked.

other  les.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

When you  nish storing the  les which you want into the Program list, select “Edit Mode” and press ENTER to release edit mode.

Edit Mode

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Edit Mode

JPEG Previe

Edit Mode

Program View

Add To Program

JPEG Preview

V/W/ / ENTER

PLAY

Press

/ / /

to select “Program View”,

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-3

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

WMA-3

Edit Mode

Browser View

Clear Program

JPEG Preview

Edit Mode

Program View

Add To Program

JPEG Preview

then press ENTER. Program View shows only

the programed  les that you have added in step

Program View

Browser View

In the Program View, press PLAY. The  les start to playback in programmed order that

were added by you.

To remove  le from program list in Stop mode

In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select  le you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear Program” and press ENTER. Marked  le is removed from program list.

Note:

The program function is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.

Advanced playback

Page 14

Function setup

Customizing the function settings

You can change the default settings of the DVD mode to customize performance to your preference.

DVD VCD

Setting procedure

Press SETUP during stop mode.

The following on-screen display appears.

Press Vor W to select the desired section,

then press

First option will be highlighted. Press to select the desired option.

Then press or ENTER. The selectable settings will appear.

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

E.B.L. : Off

Menu : English

Set Password

QSound : On

TV Screen : 4:3

Subtitle : English

Output : Interlace

Display : On

Audio : English

DivX(R) VOD

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

Menu : English

TV Screen : 4:3

Set Password

QSound : On

Subtitle : English

Display : On

Output : Interlace

Audio : English

Picture Mode : Auto

DivX(R) VOD

JPEG Interval : Off

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

Menu : English

TV Screen : 4:3

Set Password

QSound : On

Subtitle : English

Display : On

Output : Interlace

Audio : English

Picture Mode : Auto

DivX(R) VOD

JPEG Interval : Off

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

Menu : English

TV Screen 4:3

Set Password

QSound : On

Subtitle : English

Display 4:3

Output : Interlace

Audio : English

Picture Mode : Auto

DivX(R) VOD

JPEG Interval : Off

Vor W

SETUP

ENTER

V/W/

RETURN

Change the selection using Vor W, by referring to the corresponding pages Press ENTER to save the setting.

• Repeat steps 3 and 5 to change

other option.

• To select another section, go

back to step 2 by pressing repeatedly.

To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP or RETURN.

Setting details

~ 49.

Section

Option

Menu Subtitle Audio

TV Screen

Display

Picture Mode

JPEG Interval

DRC

Parental

Password

DivX(R) VOD

Details

To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one language are available on the disc.

To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your TV.

To turn On or Off the operational status display on the screen.

To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”, “Film” or “Auto”.

To select a preferred setting for the slide show playback.

To select On or Off for DRC (Dynamic Range Control).

To select a preferred parental level for the parental setting.

To change the password.

To display your 8-character registration code.

Page

Function setup

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Setting details

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

E.B.L. : Off

Menu : English

Set Password

QSound : On

TV Screen : 4:3

Subtitle : English

Output : Interlace

Display : On

Audio : English

DivX(R) VOD

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Menu, Subtitle, Audio

You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto the disc.

English, Francais, Espanol:

The selected language will be heard or seen.

Other:

Other language can be selected (see “Language

code list”

Original (Audio):

The unit will select the  rst priority language of each disc.

Off (Subtitle):

Subtitles do not appear.

Notes:

• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the  rst-priority language is selected.

• If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform it by TV SETUP MENU

TV Screen

You have the following screen sizes to choose from:

4:3

Select this mode when connecting to a conventional TV. When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands at the top and bottom of screen.

4:3

It displays the wide picture on the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off.

Note:

If the DVD disc is not formatted in the Pan & scan style, it will display 4:3 style.

(Letter box):

(Pan & scan):

Display

On screen display can be switched on or off when you press any buttons.

On: On screen displays appear when you press

the buttons (factory setting).

Off: On screen displays do not appear when you

press any buttons.

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

Menu : English

TV Screen : 4:3

Set Password

QSound : On

Subtitle : English

Display : On

Output : Interlace

Audio : English

Picture Mode : Auto

DivX(R) VOD

JPEG Interval : Off

Picture Mode

There are two types of source content in pictures recorded in DVD video discs:  lm content (pictures recorded from  lms at 24 frames per second) and video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per second). Make this selection according to the type of content being viewed.

Auto: Select this selection normally. The DVD player automatically detects

source content,  lm or video of playback source, and converts that signal in the progressive output format in an appropriate method.

Film: The DVD player converts  lm content

pictures in the progressive output format appropriately. Suitable for playback of  lm content pictures. The progressive output feature will be most effective under this selection.

Video: The DVD player  lters video signal and

converts it in the progressive output format appropriately.

Suitable for playback of video content

pictures.

Note:

Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled. In this case, select “Video”.

JPEG Interval

You can continuously playback all JPEG  les automatically. After the selection below, the disc will start playback on JPEG  les which have been recorded.

Off:

Plays back one  le at a time.

5 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 5 second intervals.

10 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 10 second intervals.

15 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 15 second intervals.

Function setup

Page 15

Function setup

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Setting details

Parental : Off

E.B.L. : Off

DRC : Off DRC : Off

Set Password

TV Screen : 4:3

Output : Interlace

Display : On

DivX(R) VOD

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

DRC

DRC (Dynamic Range Control) enables you to control the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.

Off:

It plays back at the recording level on the disc.

On:

Loud sound such as explosion is toned down slightly when played back. This is suitable when it is connected to a stereo.

Notes:

• This function works only during playback of Dolby Digital

recorded discs.

• The level of Dynamic Range Reduction may differ

depending on DVD video disc.

Menu : English

E.B.L. : Off

Parental : Off

QSound : On

Subtitle : English

TV Screen : 4:3

Password : Change

Audio : English

Display : On

DivX(R) VOD : Display

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Parental control setting

Some discs are speci ed as not suitable for children. Such discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.

or to select “Parental”, then press

1) Press ENTER. “Enter Password” screen will appear.

2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9). (Please note, this is pre-setting password of this unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list will appear.

• Level Off: The parental control setting does not

function.

• Level 8: All DVD software can be played

back.

• Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be

played back.

3) Press or to select from the level 1 to level 8. The limitation will be more severe as the level number is lower. Then press ENTER.

Notes:

• Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.

• Some discs may not be encoded with speci c rating

level information though its disc jacket says “adult.” For those discs, the age restriction will not work.

• The password is required every time when you change the parental level.

• If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.

Q Set the new password

1) Press

or to select “Password”, then press

ENTER. “Enter Current Password” screen will appear.

2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current

password (If the password has not been set yet after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).

3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen will appear. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the new password.

4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been set. Be sure to remember this number!

If you forget the password.

1) Press EJECT to remove the disc.

2) While holding 7 down on the remote control and

then press STOP on the unit. “Password Clear” appears on the screen. Now the password has been returned to the initial value (“0000”).

DivX

VOD

In order to play DivX content on this unit, you  rst need to register the unit with your DivX generating a DivX submit to your provider.

Press

press ENTER. Your 8-character registration code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX Then press ENTER to select Done.

Note: If each setup (pages 46 ~ 49) has completed, the unit can always work under the same condition (especially with DVD discs). Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn the power off.

VOD (Video On Demand)

VOD content provider. You do this by

VOD registration code, which you

or to select “DivX(R) VOD”. Then

VOD provider.

Function setup

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc

Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level that you have set. It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.

DVD

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc

Load a DVD disc.

If the DVD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the Rating level, the screen

which follows the “Reading” screen will change, depending on which disc is played. If you select “YES” with the ENTER key, password input screen will then appear.

• If “NO” is selected, press EJECT to remove the disc.

Enter the password with Number buttons (0–9). Then press ENTER.

To exit from the entry, press

RETURN.

Enter Password

Playback will commence if the entered password is correct.

Note:

This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the disc is ejected. When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again automatically.

EJECT

0–9

ENTER RETURN

Others

Language code list

Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” 46.

Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code

Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919

Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak 2921

Afrikaans 1116 French 1628 Macedonian 2321 Slovenian 2922

Albanian 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925

Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish 1529

Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931

Armenian 1835 German 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933

Assamese 1129 Greek 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932

Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022

Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017

Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011

Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030

Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015

Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018

Bihari 1218 Hungarian 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225

Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019

Bulgarian 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025

Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028

Byelorussian 1215 Irish 1711 Polish 2622 Turkmen 3021

Cambodian 2123 Italian 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033

Catalan 1311 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian 3121

Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033 Rhaeto-Romance 2823 Urdu 3128

Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek 3136

Croatian 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian 2831 Vietnamese 3219

Czech 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225

Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335

Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325

English 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa 3418

Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish 2019

Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525

Faroese 1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu 3631

Others

Page 16

Others

Troubleshooting

Use the following check list for troubleshooting when you have problems with your unit. Consult your local dealer or service outlet if problems persist. Be sure all connections are properly made when using with other units.

SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE

POWER

TV/DVD does not operate.

TV BROADCAST RECEPTION

Poor sound or No sound.

Poor picture or No picture.

Poor reception on some channels.

Poor color or no color.

Picture wobbles or drifts.

No CATV reception.

Horizontal or diagonal bars on screen.

No reception above channel 13.

TV shuts off.

Closed - Caption is not activated.

Display is not shown in your language.

• Make sure the connection of AC cord is secured.

• Try another AC outlet.

• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Check Volume adjustments.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Check picture control adjustments.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Station signal is weak, reorient antenna to receive weaker station.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Make sure channels are set into memory.

• Check picture control adjustments.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Make sure channels are set into memory.

• Cable TV company is scrambling signal.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check all Cable TV connections.

• Set TV/CABLE selection to the CABLE position.

• Station or Cable TV system problems, try another station.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Make sure TV/CABLE selection is in the appropriate position.

• If antenna is used, check UHF antenna connections.

• No broadcast on station tuned.

• Auto shut off feature worked.

• Sleep Timer is set.

• Power interrupted.

• TV station experiencing problems or program tuned is not closed captioned. Try another channel.

• Check Cable TV connection or VHF/UHF antenna, reposition or rotate antenna.

• Press CLOSED CAPTION button to turn on the closed caption decoder.

• Select proper language in the menu options. 21

14,15

23 23 54

54 26

23 14 54

23 22 26

23 22

15 22 23

22 14

22 23 24

SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE

DVD

Playback doesn’t start.

No picture. • TV/DVD selector is not set correctly. 29

No sound.

Picture is distorted during fast reverse/forward playback.

Stopping playback, search, slowmotion play, repeat play, or program play, etc. cannot be performed.

No on-screen display. • Set Display to On. 46

The unit or remote operation key is not functioning.

Playback does not start when the title is selected.

Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle language is not changed when

you playback a DVD.

No subtitle.

Angle cannot be changed. • Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc. 35

“” appears on the screen. • The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc. 31

REMOTE CONTROL

The remote control does not function.

• No disc is loaded.

• The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc.

• The unit cannot play CD-ROMs, etc.

• Check the input selector of the ampli er is set properly.

• The unit is in the special playback mode.

• Select the correct Audio Input/Output position on AV ampli er.

• The picture will be distorted occasionally. -

• Some discs may not do some of the functions. -

• Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes, then replug it.

• Check the RATING LEVEL setup. 48

• Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc. 36

• Some discs have no subtitles.

• Subtitles are cleared. Press the SUBTITLE button.

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.

• Operate within approx. 5 meters or reduce the light in the room.

• Clear the path of the beam.

• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.

• Check the batteries are inserted correctly.

7 8

31 18

Others

Reception disturbances

Most types of television interference can be remedied by adjusting the height and position of the VHF/UHF antenna. Outdoor antennas are recommended for best results. The most common types of television interference are shown below. If one of these symptoms appear when the TV/DVD is connected to a Cable TV system, the disturbance may be caused by the local Cable TV company broadcast.

IGNITION

Black spots or horizontal streaks may appear, the picture may  utter or drift. Usually caused by interference from automobile ignition systems, neon lamps or AC powered tools and appliances such as drills or hair dryers.

GHOSTS

Ghosts are caused by the television signal following two paths. One is the direct path and the other is re ected by tall buildings, hills or other large objects. Changing the direction or position of the antenna may improve the reception.

SNOW

If the TV/DVD is located far from the TV station, in a fringe reception area where the signal is weak, small dots may appear in the picture. If the signal is extremely weak, the installation of a larger external antenna may be necessary.

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI)

Caused by two-way radios, this type of interference produces moving ripples or diagonal streaks in the picture. Some cases may cause a loss of contrast in the picture. Changing the direction and position of the antenna or installing an RFI  lter may improve the picture.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

To prevent  re or shock hazard, disconnect the TV/DVD from the power source before cleaning. Use caution when cleaning or wiping the plastic parts.

Speci cations

General

Power supply AC 120V 60Hz (with supplied AC adapter)

Power consumption Operation: 50 W, Stand by: 1 W (with supplied AC adapter)

Weight 13.2 lbs (6.0 kg)

Dimensions

Operating temperature 5°C-40°C (41°F-104°F)

Operating humidity Less than 80% RH (No condensation)

Television

LCD panel 15-inch diagonal (Screen size is approximate.)

Display method Color TFT LCD

Number of pixels 1024 (Horizontal) x 768 (Vertical)

Tuner type F-Synth

Receiving channels

Antenna input VHF/UHF 75 

Speaker 1-1/2 x 2-11/16 inches (38.1 x 68.6 mm), 8  x 2

Audio output power 1.5W + 1.5W

DVD/CD Player

Signal system NTSC

Applicable disc

Pickup 1-Lens, 2-Beams System

Input/Output

S-Video input

ColorStream video input

Video input 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , negative sync., pin jack x 2

Audio input –8 dBm, 50 k, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2

Digital audio output (Coaxial) 0.5 V (p-p), 75 , pin jack x 1

Headphone ø3.5mm stereo mini jack x 1

Accessories

Remote control (DC-LB1) ............................................. 1

Batteries (R03/AAA) ..................................................... 2

AC adapter ................................................................... 1

AC cord (for AC adapter) .............................................. 1

300-75  matching transformer..................................... 1

Owner’s manual (this booklet) ...................................... 1

• This model complies with the above speci cations.

• Designs and speci cations are subject to change without notice.

• This model may not be compatible with features and/or speci cations that may be added in the future.

Width: 18-3/4 inches (476 mm) Height: 13-15/16 inches (353.5 mm) Depth: 9-1/16 inches (230 mm)

VHF: 2-13 UHF: 14-69 CATV: 1-125 (4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84)

1. DVD (12cm, 8cm)

2. CD (12cm, 8cm)

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1 (C) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , negative sync., pin jack x 1

B, PR) 0.7 V (p-p), 75 , pin jack x 2

Others

Page 17

Others

Limited Canadian Warranty for Toshiba Brand Flat Panel Televisions

Toshiba of Canada Limited (“TCL”) makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in Canada. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS TOSHIBA BRAND FLAT PANEL TELEVISION (the “TELEVISION(S)” or “Television(s)”) AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN CANADA, AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF CANADA INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE UNITED STATES AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF CANADA, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE UNITED STATES AND MEXICO, AND USED IN CANADA, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labour

Subject to the more limited warranty if the Television is used for any commercial or business purposes as set out below, TCL warrants the Television and its parts against material defects in materials or workmanship that result in the Television failing for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD,

TCL WILL, AT TCL’S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR LABOUR.

(a) FOR TELEVISIONS 32 INCHES OR LESS: YOU MUST

DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION TO A TCL TELEVISION AUTHORIZED SERVICE PROVIDER (“ASP”). YOU MUST PAY FOR ALL TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP.

(b) FOR TELEVISIONS OVER 32 INCHES: During this period,

ASP personnel will come to your home when warranty service is required. Depending on the type of repair required, the service will either be performed in your home or the Television will be taken to an ASP for repair and returned to your home at no cost to you.

IN-HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN ASP. IF YOU ARE NOT WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN ASP, YOU MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION TO AN ASP. YOU MUST PAY FOR ALL TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP.

Limited Warranty for Commercial Units

TCL warrants Televisions that are used for any commercial or business purposes as follows: all parts are warranted against material defects in materials or workmanship that result in the Television failing for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original retail purchase.

DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCL’S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE THE DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.

THE ENTIRE TELEVISION TO AN ASP. YOU MUST PAY FOR ALL TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP.

(d) FOR TELEVISIONS OVER OVER 32 INCHES: During this

period, ASP personnel will come on-site when warranty service is required. Depending on the type of repair required, the service will either be performed on-site or the Television will be taken to an ASP for repair and returned at no cost to you. ON-SITE SERVICE

ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN ASP. IF YOU ARE NOT WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN ASP, YOU MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION TO AN ASP. YOU MUST PAY FOR ALL TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP.

Rental Units

The warranty for Television rental units begins with the date of  rst rental or thirty (30) days from the date of shipment to the rental  rm, whichever comes  rst.

Your Responsibility

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

(1) You must provide your bill of sale or other proof of purchase.

(2) All warranty servicing of this Television must be performed by an

ASP.

(3) The warranties from TCL are effective only if the Television is

(i) purchased as new and unopened from TCL or from TCL’s authorized distributors, dealers or resellers (“ADR’s”) and (ii) located/operated in Canada.

(4) Labour charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer

controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered by these warranties. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems are your responsibility.

(5) Warranties extend only to material defects in materials or

workmanship as limited above, and do not extend to:

a. Service, repairs or replacement made necessary by accident,

misuse, abuse, moisture, liquids, dust, dirt, neglect, accident, damage, 24/7 applications, improper installation, improper operation, improper cleaning, improper maintenance, normal wear and tear, screen burn or image retention caused by prolonged display of static images and/or phosphor aging, or any other external cause or event, act or omission outside the control of TCL, including  re, theft, acts of God, alteration, power failures, power surges or power shortages, lightning, other electrical faults, or repairs, modi cations or replacements by persons other than those authorized by TCL to service the Television;

b. Replacement of missing, discarded or lost parts, the provision of

retro ts, or preventive maintenance;

c. Repair of damage that is cosmetic only or does not affect the

Television functionality, such as wear and tear, scratches and dents;

d. Service on Toshiba-branded accessory items (such accessory

items may be covered by their own warranty);

e. Service on third party products or service made necessary by use

of incompatible third party products;

f. Service made necessary by the simultaneous use of this Television

and connected equipment;

g. Modi cations to the Television not approved in writing by TCL, and

service made necessary by the use or installation of non-Toshiba modi cations to the Television;

h. Service of a Television on which the TOSHIBA label or logo, rating

label or serial number have been defaced or removed; i. On-site service and repair of the Television; and j. Damage to the Television caused by failure to follow the

speci cations, User manuals or guides as to usage and/or storage.

Disclaimer and Limitation of Remedy

TO THE EXTENT NOT PRECLUDED BY LAW, ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND REPRESENTATIONS FOR THIS TELEVISION, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND REPRESENTATIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED AND EXCLUDED. IF THE APPLICABLE LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, PRECLUDES THE EXCLUSION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND REPRESENTATIONS THEN SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND REPRESENTATIONS ARE OTHERWISE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE TERM OF THIS EXPRESS WRITTEN LIMITED WARRANTY. TO THE EXTENT NOT PRECLUDED BY LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY SUPERCEDES AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY OTHER WARRANTY, CONDITION OR REPRESENTATION NOT STATED IN THIS WARRANTY, WHETHER MADE BY TCL, TOSHIBA CORPORATION, THEIR AFFILIATES, ADRs AND ASPs AND WHETHER MADE ORALLY OR IN WRITING (INCLUDING ANY STATEMENT IN ANY BROCHURE, PRESS RELEASE, ANNOUNCEMENT, ADVERTISEMENT, POINT OF SALE DISPLAY, ETC.).

YOU MUST READ AND FOLLOW ALL SET-UP AND USAGE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE APPLICABLE USER GUIDES AND/OR MANUALS. IF YOU FAIL TO DO SO, THIS TELEVISION MAY NOT FUNCTION PROPERLY AND YOU MAY SUFFER DAMAGE. THIS WARRANTY WILL NOT COVER ANY SERVICE THAT IS REQUIRED, IN PART OR IN WHOLE, AS A RESULT OF ANY FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE SET-UP AND USAGE INSTRUCTIONS. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY AND SHALL BE VOID AND UNENFORCEABLE IF THE TELEVISION IS OPENED, SERVICED, OR REPAIRED BY PERSONS OTHER THAN THOSE AUTHORIZED BY TCL TO SERVICE OR REPAIR THE TELEVISION.

IF THE TELEVISION FAILS TO WORK AS WARRANTED ABOVE, YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE PART. IN NO EVENT WILL TCL, TOSHIBA CORPORATION, THEIR AFFILIATES, ADRs OR ASPs (THE “RELATED PARTIES”) BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES, MONEY, REIMBURSEMENT, COSTS OR EXPENSES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO DAMAGES, MONEY, REIMBURSEMENT, COSTS OR EXPENSES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER INCLUDING ANY DIRECT OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, DAMAGE TO PROPERTY OR PERSON, LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCONVENIENCE OR OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), UNDER A STATUTE OR UNDER ANY OTHER LAW OR FORM OR ACTION, OR WHETHER ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELEVISION, EVEN IF ANY OF THE RELATED PARTIES HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR OF ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.

No person, agent, distributor, dealer or company is authorized to change, modify or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.

Arbitration and Dispute Resolution

To the extent not precluded by law, any claim, dispute, controversy or disagreement (whether for breach of warranty, breach of contract, tort (including negligence), under a statute or under any other law or form of action) against any of the Related Parties arising out of, or otherwise relating to: (i) this warranty; (ii) the Television; (iii) any oral or written representations, statements, brochures, press releases, advertising, announcement, point of sale display, or promotional material relating to the Television; (iv) the relationships that result from this warranty, (the foregoing claims, disputes controversies and disagreements are collectively referred to as the “Dispute”), shall be referred to and resolved by  nal and binding arbitration (to the exclusion of the courts). To the extent not precluded by law, you agree to waive any right that you may have to commence or participate in any representative or class proceeding against the Related Parties relating to any Dispute. If and where applicable and to the extent not precluded by law, you further agree to opt out of any such representative or class proceedings.

Arbitration of any Dispute will be conducted in the forum and in the manner as agreed to between you and TCL. Failing such agreement, the arbitration will be conducted by one arbitrator pursuant to the laws and rules relating to arbitration generally in force in the jurisdiction in which you reside at the time that the Dispute arises. To the extent not precluded by law, no claim, dispute, controversy or disagreement of any other person may be joined or combined with any Dispute by you, without the prior written consent of TCL.

Critical Applications

The Television you have purchased is not designed for any “critical applications.” “Critical applications” means life support systems, medical applications, connections to implanted medical devices, commercial transportation, nuclear facilities or systems or any other applications where Television failure could lead to injury to persons or loss of life or catastrophic property damage.

IF THE CUSTOMER USES THE TELEVISION IN ANY CRITICAL APPLICATION, THE CUSTOMER – AND NOT TCL, ITS AFFILIATES, ADRs OR ASPs – ASSUME SOLE AND FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUCH USE. TCL RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REFUSE TO SERVICE ANY TELEVISION USED IN A CRITICAL APPLICATION. TCL, ITS AFFILIATES, ADRs AND ASPs HEREBY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL LIABILITY, DAMAGES AND CONSEQUENCES ARISING OUT OF THE SERVICE OR REFUSAL TO SERVICE SUCH TELEVISION AND FURTHER DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL LIABILITY, CONSEQUENCES AND DAMAGES THAT MAY ARISE OR RESULT FROM THE USE OF THE TELEVISION IN ANY CRITICAL APPLICATIONS.

General Provisions

If and to the extent that any provision of this limited warranty should generally be found to be unenforceable, the unenforceable provision shall be severed from the warranty and deemed not to form part of the warranty. The remaining provisions of this warranty shall be and remain valid and enforceable. If and to the extent that any provision of this limited warranty as it relates to any of the Related Parties is found to be invalid or unenforceable in respect of that party (the “Excluded Party”), the Excluded Party shall be deemed to be severed or excluded from the provision, and the provision shall remain valid, enforceable and applicable in respect of the other or remaining Related Parties.

To the extent permitted by law, this limited warranty shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of Ontario.

If there is any inconsistency between this limited warranty, on the one hand, and any statement in the packaging of the Television or in any other document enclosed with, or used in the context of the promotion or sale of, the Television, on the other hand, the provisions of this limited warranty shall prevail.

How to Obtain Warranty Services

If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking the “Troubleshooting” section, you  nd that service is needed:

(1) To  nd the nearest ASP, visit TCL’s web site at www.toshiba.ca, or

call toll free 1-800-268-3404

(2) Present your bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the ASP.

For additional information, visit TCL’s website at www.toshiba.ca

OthersOthers

MEMO

Page 18

CAUTION

THIS

LCD COLOR TELEVISION

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

PREPARATION OF SERVICING

The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity. Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened. Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode at the time of repair.

• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.

• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.

• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.

A1-1

Page 19

IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION

Safety precautions to be followed during servicing:

Parts marked with an

are critical parts for safety. Replace only with the one described in the parts

list.

Before returning the DVD product to the customer, make the appropriate leakage current check or resistance measurements to ensure that exposed parts are properly insulated from the supply circuit.

A leakage current check is recommended for this unit. Plug the AC line cord directly into a 120V 60Hz AC outlet (do not use an isolation transformer for this check). Use a leakage current tester (Fig. 1) or a metering system which complies with Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1492P). Measure for current from all exposed metal parts of the cabinet to a known earth ground: particularly, any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis. Any current measured must not exceed 0.5mA. Any measurement not within the limits outlined above are indicative of a potential shock hazard and corrective action must be taken before returning the unit to the customer.

(Reading should not be above 0.5mA)

Leakage Current Tester

KNOWN EARTH GROUND

2-Blade polarized type cord set

PRODUCTUNDERTEST

Test all exposed metal surfaces

1.5K ohm

0.15 μF

TESTPROBE

Fig. 1 AC Leakage Test

A1-2

Page 20

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

READ INSTRUCTIONS

All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS

The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

HEED WARNINGS

All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS

All operating and use instructions should be followed.

CLEANING

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

ATTACHMENTS

Do not use attachments not recommended by the unit’s manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

WATER AND MOISTURE

Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

ACCESSORIES

Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer.

8A.

An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.

VENTILATION

Slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the unit on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

10.

POWER SOURCES

This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For units intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.

11.

GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION

This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. If your unit is equipped with a 3-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin, this plug will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This too, is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.

POWER-CORD PROTECTION

12.

Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.

LIGHTNING

13.

To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the unit due to lightning and power line surges.

POWER LINES

14.

An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be fatal.

OVERLOADING

15.

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

16.

OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY

Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

PORTABLE CART WARNING

(symbol provided by RETAC)

S3126A

A1-3

Page 21

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)

OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING

17.

If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

SERVICING

18.

Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE

19.

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.

If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.

If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.

If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal operation.

If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

20.

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

SAFETY CHECK

21.

Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING

22.

The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

HEAT

23.

The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

DISC TRAY

24.

Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.

CONNECTING

25.

When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.

SOUND VOLUME

26.

Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume sound may cause hearing or speaker damage.

SOUND DISTORTION

27.

Do not allow the product output distorted sound for a longtime. It may cause speaker overheating and fire.

HEADPHONES

28.

When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continuously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.

LASER BEAM

29.

Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the laser beam. It may cause sight damage.

DISC

30.

Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal injury and product malfunction.

NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER

31.

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

A1-4

Page 22

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810-20)

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

S2898A

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250, PART H)

A1-5

Page 23

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK

[ When removing the DVD Deck ]

Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector, the short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

[ When installing the DVD Deck ]

Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

NOTE

Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.

• Use the Lead Free solder.

• Manual soldering conditions

•

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20˚C

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the

• Flux smoke away from it.

Pick Up PCB

Short circuit using a soldering iron.

Fig. 1

A1-6

Page 24

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY

Remove the Back Cabinet and Angle Deck. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)

Slide the Belt Loading toward the arrow direction by hand to release the lock. (Refer to Fig. 1)

Take out the Disc from the DVD Deck. Be careful not to scratch on the Disc.

DVD Deck

Belt Loading

Fig. 1

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL

4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION

If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

1. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

2. Check that ‘No disc’ is displayed on the screen.

3. Press and hold the ‘STOP’ button on the front panel.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the ‘7’ key on the remote control unit.

5. Hold both keys for more than 2 seconds.

6. The On Screen Display message ‘PASSWORD CLEAR’ will appear.

7. The 4 digit password has now been cleared.

TRAY LOCK

The disk cannot be taken out by setting the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

1. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

2. Press it in order of ‘SETUP’, ‘SUBTITLE’, ‘3’, ‘AUDIO’ and ‘0’ key of a remote control unit.

3. The On Screen Display message ‘ ‘ will appear.

4. The Tray Lock has now been set up.

To unlock the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

1. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

2. Press it in order of ‘SETUP’, ‘SUBTITLE’, ‘3’, ‘AUDIO’ and ‘0’ key of a remote control unit.

3. The On Screen Display message ‘ ‘ will appear.

4. The Tray Lock has now been cleared.

A1-7

Page 25

TABLE OF CONTENTS

• GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

• LEAD-FREE SOLDER

• OWNER'S MANUAL

CAUTION .....................................................................................................................

IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION .....................................................

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .....................................................................................

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ................................................................................

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ...............................................

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL .................................................................

TRAY LOCK ................................................................................................................

TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................................................................

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P.C. BOARDS ................................

2.REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS ......................................................................

3.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC ..................................

SERVICE MODE LIST .................................................................................................

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS ........................................................................

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE .............................................................................

CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM ............................................................................

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC ...........................................................

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ....................................................................................

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

DVD ..........................................................................................................................

AV ............................................................................................................................

POWER ....................................................................................................................

SCALER ...................................................................................................................

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

SCALER ...................................................................................................................

AV/OPERATION/REMOCON/SIDE JACK ...............................................................

DVD MT/OPERATION2 ...........................................................................................

BACK LIGHT/SW .....................................................................................................

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP ..................................................................................

MEMORY .................................................................................................................

AUDIO/VIDEO ..........................................................................................................

MOTOR DRIVE ........................................................................................................

REGULATOR2 .........................................................................................................

OPERATION2 ..........................................................................................................

JACK ........................................................................................................................

TUNER/STEREO .....................................................................................................

AV SWITCH .............................................................................................................

SOUND ....................................................................................................................

POWER ....................................................................................................................

OPERATION/SIDE JACK/REMOCON .....................................................................

MICON .....................................................................................................................

SCALER ...................................................................................................................

LVDS ........................................................................................................................

SYNC SEPA .............................................................................................................

REGULATOR ...........................................................................................................

INVERTER ...............................................................................................................

SW ...........................................................................................................................

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................

WAVEFORMS .............................................................................................................

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEWS ...........................................................................

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ...................................................................................

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ..........................................................

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ................................................................

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ............................................................

A1-1 A1-2 A1-3~A1-5 A1-6 A1-7 A1-7 A1-7 A2-1 A3-1~A3-6

B1-1~B1-4 B2-1, B2-2 B3-1, B3-2 C-1 C-2 C-2 C-3 C-3 D-1~D-4 E-1~E-11

F-1, F-2 F-3, F-4 F-5, F-6 F-7, F-8

G-1, G-2 G-3~G-6 G-7, G-8 G-9, G-10

H-1, H-2 H-3, H-4 H-5, H-6 H-7, H-8 H-9, H-10 H-11, H-12 H-13, H-14 H-15, H-16 H-17, H-18 H-19, H-20 H-21, H-22 H-23, H-24 H-25, H-26 H-27, H-28 H-29, H-30 H-31, H-32 H-33, H-34 H-35, H-36 H-37, H-38 H-39, H-40 I-1~I-4 J1-1~J1-3 J2-1 K1-1, K1-2 K2-1 K3-1~K3-5

A2-1

Page 26

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-1 TV

System

G-2 DVD System

G-3 Tuning

System

G-4 Signal

G-5 Power

LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 15.0 inch / 380.0mmV

LCD Type Color TFT LCD Number of Pixels 1024(H) x 768(V)

View Range Left/Right 70/70 degree

Up/Down 60/65 degree Color System NTSC Speaker 2 Speaker

Position Front Size 1.5 x 2.7 inch Impedance 8 ohm

Sound Output Max 1.5W + 1.5W

10%(Typical) --Color System NTSC Disc Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm Drive DSM-2 Search speed Fwd 4 step

Rev 4 step

Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times

Rev 1/7 -1/2 times

Broadcasting System US System M Tuner and System 1Tuner Receive CH Destination US(W/CABLE)

CH Coverage 2~69, 4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84 Intermediate Picture(FP) 45.75MHz Frequency Sound(FS) 41.25MHz

FP-FS 4.50MHz Preset CH No Stereo/Dual TV Sound US-Stereo Tuner Sound Muting Yes Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm

Output Level --

S/N Ratio (Weighted) --

Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode --

RGB Signal Output Level -Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm

Output Level --

Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm

S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted) --

Harmonic Distortion --

Frequency Response : at DVD --

at Video CD --

at SVCD --

Power Source AC 120V, 60Hz

DC -Power Consumption at AC Adapter 50W at 120V 60Hz

Stand by (at AC Adapter) 1W at 120V 60Hz

Energy Star Yes

Per Year -- kWh/Year Protector Power Fuse Yes

Safety Circuit Yes

IC Protector(Micro Fuse) Yes

DVD,

Actual 2-45 times (DVD)

4-40 times (CD)

Actual 2-45 times (DVD)

4-40 times (CD)

Actual --

at CD --

at DC --

A3-1

Page 27

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-6 Regulation

G-7 Temperature

G-8 Operating Humidity G-9 Clock and

Timer

G-10 Remote

Control

Clock No Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min

On Timer Program No Off Timer Program No Wake Up Timer No Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec Unit RC-LB Glow in Dark Remocon Yes Remocon Format ORION Format NEC Custom Code 71-8E h Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V

Total Keys 47 Key Keys Power Yes

Safety cUL(E650065_00)

Radiation IC

Laser --

Operation

Storage

Step 10 Min

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

1 Yes

2 Yes

3 Yes

4 Yes

5 Yes

6 Yes

7 Yes

8 Yes

9 Yes

0 Yes

Play Yes

Stop Yes

Search+ Yes

Search- Yes

Skip+ Yes

Skip- Yes

Slow+ Yes

Slow- Yes

Pause/Still/Step Yes

Recall Yes

TV/DVD Yes

Cancel Yes

Audio Select Yes

Angle Yes

Subtitle Yes

Top Menu Yes

Setup/ Menu Yes

DVD Menu Yes

Return Yes

Up / CH Up Yes

Down / CH Down Yes

Vol Down Yes

Vol Up Yes

Left Yes

Right Yes

Enter Yes

Play Mode Yes

Closed Caption Yes

Input Select Yes

Repeat A-B Yes

C ~ +40oC

-20

C ~ +60oC

Less than 80% RH

A3-2

Page 28

G-11 Features

(TV)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Zoom/ Quick View Yes

Mute Yes

Eject Yes

Sleep Yes

Jump Yes

Game Yes

Freeze frame No Auto Shut Off Yes Auto Search No Power On Memory No Comb Filter Yes

2D Game Position Yes Auto Setup(Language/CH Program) No Picture Setting Yes

Picture Preference Yes Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes Tint Yes Sharpness Yes Color Temperature Yes Cable Clear No

Audio MTS Yes

Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes Stable Sound No Surround Yes BBE No SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No Valiable Audio Out No

Tuning CH Program Yes

TV/Cable Yes ADD/DELETE Yes

Label CH Label No

Video Label No Favorite CH No V-Chip No

Type ---RRT Setup No Lock Hotel Lock No

Channel Lock No

Video Lock No

Panel Lock No OSD Language Closed Caption CC Advanced No Picture Size No Picture Scroll No Cinema Mode No Aspect Backlight No PFC(Power Factor circuit) Freeze frame No PIP/POP No Direct Input Selection No Game Position Yes PC Monitor Input No HDMI Input No Component Input Yes

720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz)

720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz)

720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz)

720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz)

720×576i (4:3) No

English French Spanish Yes

A3-3

Page 29

Features (DVD)

G-12 Accessories

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

720×576i (16:9) No

720×576p (4:3) No

720×576p (16:9) No

1280×720p No

1920×1080i No Tray Lock Yes WMA Yes JPEG Yes Video CD Playback Yes SVCD Playback

Overlay Graphics And Text No

Command List No

Entry Point Jump No MP3 Playback Yes Divx Playback Yes

DMF Support No Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

(MPEG) Yes

(PCM) Yes

(DTS) Yes Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

(DTS) No 3D Surround No Closed Caption Yes Screen Saver No Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit Owner's Manual Language English/French

w/Guarantee Card Yes Remote Control Unit Yes Rod Antenna

Poles --

Terminal -Loop Antenna

Terminal -U/V Mixer DC Car Cord (Center+) No Guarantee Card No Warning Sheet No Circuit Diagram No Antenna Change Plug No Service Facility List No Important Safeguard No Dew/AHC Caution Sheet No Quick Set-up Sheet No Battery Yes

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

OEM Brand No AC Adapter Yes AC Cord (for AC Adapter) Yes AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin) Registration Card Yes 300 ohm to 75 ohm Antenna Adapter Yes Sheet Information (Return) Yes(Canada version)

A3-4

Page 30

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-13 Interface

G-14 Set Size

G-15 Weight

G-16 Carton

G-17 Material

G-18 Environment

Switch Top Power (Tact) Yes

Channel Up Yes

Channel Down Yes

Volume Up Yes

Volume Down Yes

Play Yes

Eject Yes

Skip+, Search+ Yes

Skip-, Search- Yes

Still/Pause No

Stop Yes

Main Power SW No

Input Select No

Rear Main Power SW No

Indicator Power/Stand-By Yes (Green / Red)

On Timer No Terminals Rear Video Input 1 RCA x 1

Audio Input 1 RCA x 2 (L/MONO, R)

S- Input 1 No

Video Output No

Audio Output No

Component Yes

Euro Scart(21Pin) No

PC Monitor Input No

Digital Audio Output Coaxial (DVD Only)

DC Jack (Center +)

VHF/UHF Antenna Input

AC Outlet No

Side Video Input 2 RCA x 1

Audio Input 2 RCA x 2 (L/MONO, R)

S- Input 2 Yes

Other Terminal Headphone

Approx. W x D x H (mm) 476 x 230 x 353.5

w/o Handle, Stand Approx. W x D x H (mm)

Net (Approx.) 6.0kg (13.2 lbs)

Net w/o Handle, Stand (Approx.) 4.5kg (9.9 lbs)

Gross (Approx.) 8.0kg (17.6 lbs)

Master Carton No

Content --- Sets

Material --- / ---

Dimensions W x D x H(mm) ---

Description of Origin ---

Gift Box Material Single/White

W/Color Photo Label No

Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 575x322x441

Description of Origin Yes

Drop Test

Height (cm) 80

Container Stuffing (40' container) 740 Cabinet Front PS 94V0 DECABROM

Rear PS 94V0 DECABROM

Jack Panel --

PCB Non-Halogen Demand No

Eyelet Demand No

Environmental standard requirement (by buyer) Green procurement of TOSHIBA

Pb-free Phase3 (Phase3A)

Measures for Whisker Yes

Yes F Type

476 x 78.5 x 312.5

Natural Dropping At 1 Corner / 3 Edges / 6

Sets/40' container

Surfaces

A3-5

Page 31

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-19 AC Power Adapter

Power Requirement AC 120V 60Hz Max Power Consumption (Adapter Only) at AC 65 W DC Output DC Jack : DC12V 4.5A Dimension Approx. W x D x H (mm) 150 x 72 x 43 Weight Approx. 450g

Provided Accessories

A3-6

Page 32

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P.C. BOARDS

1-1: HINGE ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 1-1)

Remove the 3 screws 1.

Remove the Stand in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the 8 screws 2.

Remove the Stand Angle in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 4 screws 3.

Remove the Hinge Ass'y in the direction of arrow (C).

Stand

(B)

(A)

1-2: BACK CABINET (Refer to Fig. 1-2)

1.2.Remove the 9 screws 1.

Remove the Back Cabinet in the direction of arrow.

Back Cabinet

(C)

Stand Angle

Hinge Ass'y

Fig. 1-1

1-3: ANGLE BACK (Refer to Fig. 1-3)

1.2.Remove the 3 screws 1. Remove the Angle Back in the direction of arrow.

Angle Back

2 3

Fig. 1-3

1-4: DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-4)

Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-4 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP2301, CP2302 and CP2303).

Remove the 4 screws 1.

Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the 2 screws 2.

Remove the Angle Deck-R in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 2 screws 3.

Remove the Angle Deck-L in the direction of arrow (C).

Short circuit using a soldering iron.

Pick Up PCB

Angle Deck-R

(B)

(C)

Angle Deck-L

DVD Deck

Fig. 1-2

B1-1

CP2303

CP2302

CP2301

(A)

Fig. 1-4

Page 33

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE

Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF

1. SERVICING”. Use the Lead Free solder.

2. Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20˚C

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing

4. equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke away from it. When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering on

5. the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD PCB connector.

1-5: BACK LIGHT PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-5)

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP3802, CP7001, CP7002, CP7003 and CP7004).

Remove the 4 screws 1.

Remove the Shield Inverter and Back Light PCB in the direction of arrow.

Shield Inverter

CP3802

Back Light PCB

CP7002

CP7004

CP7001

CP7003

Fig. 1-5

Shield FFC

DVD MT PCB

CP4203

CP3803

Shield MPEG

CP203

1-7: SCALER PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-7)

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP202, CP204, CP801, CP3804 and CP7201).

Remove the 2 screws 1.

Remove the Shield Scaler in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the 2 screws 2.

Remove the 2 screws 3.

Remove the Scaler PCB in the direction of arrow (B).

CP202

(A)

(B)

CP204

CP7201

Shield Scaler

Scaler PCB

CP801

CP3804

Fig. 1-6

1-6: DVD MT PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-6)

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP203, CP3803 and CP4203).

Remove the 4 screws 1.

Remove the Shield FFC, Shield MPEG and DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow.

Fig. 1-7

B1-2

Page 34

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1-8: SIDE JACK PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-8)

Disconnect the following connectors: (CP301, CP4402 and CP4403).

Remove the 2 screws 1.

Remove the Side Jack PCB in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the Shield Jack-Side and Plate Jack-Side in the direction of arrow (B).

Plate Jack-Side

Shield Jack-Side

(B)

(A)

Side Jack PCB

CP4402

CP4403

CP301

Fig. 1-8

1-9: AV PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-9)

Remove the 2 screws 1.

Remove the screw 2.

Remove the screw 3.

Remove the Plate Jack-1 and Shield Jack-1 in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the 2 screws 4.

Remove the 3 screws 5.

Remove the Plate Jack-2 and Shield Jack-2 in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 5 screws 6.

Remove the AV PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

OPERATION PCB/REMOCON PCB (Refer

1-10:

to Fig. 1-10)

Disconnect the following connector: (CP2251).

Remove the 2 screws 1.

Remove the Holder PCB-DVD in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the 2 screws 2.

Remove the Operation 2 PCB in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 2 screws 3.

Remove the Holder PCB-TV in the direction of arrow (C).

Remove the 2 screws 4.

Remove the Operation PCB in the direction of arrow (D).

10.

Remove the 2 screws 5.

11.

Remove the Remocon PCB in the direction of arrow (E).

(E)

Remocon PCB

Holder PCB-TV

Operation PCB

(C)

(A)

(B)

Holder PCB-DVD

Operation 2 PCB

Fig. 1-10

CP2251

(D)

AV PCB

Plate Jack-2

Shield Jack-2

(C)

(B)

(A)

Plate Jack-1

Shield Jack-1

Fig. 1-9

B1-3

Page 35

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1-11: LCD COVER/LCD PANEL (Refer to Fig. 1-11)

Remove the 2 screws 1.

Remove the 2 screws 2.

Remove the Angle Hinge in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the 8 screws 3.

Remove the LCD Cover in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 4 screws 4.

Remove the LCD Panel in the direction of arrow (C).

Angle Hinge

(A)

Front Cabinet

(B)

(C)

LCD Panel

LCD Cover

Fig. 1-11

B1-4

Page 36

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS

NOTE

1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

2-1: TRAVERSE ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A)

Remove the 3 screws 1.

1. Unlock the 2 supports 2.

2. Remove the Insulator (R) from the Loader Sub Ass'y.

3. Remove the Traverse Ass'y.

Loader Sub Ass'y

Traverse Ass'y

• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm

Insulator (R)

Fig. 2-1-A

Check Hook

Loader Ass'y (Top Side)

Check Hook

Fig. 2-1-D

2-2:

SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/GEAR MIDDLE/GEAR FEED/RACK FEED ASS'Y/FEED MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 2-2-A)

Remove the Insulator (F).

Remove the Insulator (R).

Unlock the support 1.

Remove the Gear Middle.

Remove the screw 2.

Remove the Rack Feed Ass'y.

Remove the screw 3. Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.

Remove the screw 4.

9. Remove the Gear Feed.

10. Remove the 2 screws 5.

11. Remove the Feed Motor.

12. Remove the Gear Motor.

13.

Feed Motor

NOTE

In case of the Traverse Ass'y installation, hook the wire

1. on the Loader Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-1-B to Fig. 2-1-C.

Loader Ass'y (Bottom Side)

Check Lock Check Lock

Check Hook

80 ± 5mm

Loader Ass'y

Fig. 2-1-B

Check Hook

Fig. 2-1-C

Traverse Ass'y

Insulator (F)

Rack Feed Ass'y

• Screw Torque: 1.3 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)

• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 3)

• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 4,5)

Gear Motor

Insulator (R)

Gear Feed

Gear Middle

Switch PCB Ass'y

Fig. 2-2-A

B2-1

Page 37

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE

When installing the Rack Feed Ass'y, push both ends to align the teeth as shown Fig. 2-2-B. Then install it.

In case of the Gear Motor installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-2-C is correct.

When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it correctly as Fig. 2-2-D. Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20˚C

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

After the assembly of the Traverse Ass'y, hook the wire on the Traverse Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-2-E.

Rack Feed Ass'y

Push

[OK] [NG]

Push

Fig. 2-2-B

Check Hook

• Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.

Traverse Ass'y

Check Hook

Fig. 2-2-E

2-3: FFC WIRE HANDLING

When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as shown from Fig. 2-3-A to Fig. 2-3-B.

NOTE

Do not make the folding lines except the specified

1. positions for the FFC.

[ 24 pin FFC ]

Fold it by 90˚

Pick Up Side

Printing Surface

20 ± 1mm

Gear Motor

Feed Motor

~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~

Safety surface for pressing of the insert.

Switch PCB Ass'y

YELLOW (2)

GREEN (1)

8.0 ± 0.2mm

Fig. 2-2-C

~ FEED MOTOR ~

WHITE (4)

BROWN (3)

• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.

Fig. 2-2-D

[ 6 pin FFC ]

30 ± 1mm

Fold it by 90˚

Fig. 2-3-A

40 ± 1mm

Fold

60 ± 1mm

Fig. 2-3-B

B2-2

Page 38

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC

REMOVAL

1. Put the Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat

Package IC to protect other parts from any damage.

(Refer to Fig. 3-1.)

NOTE

Masking is carried out on all the parts located within 10 mm distance from IC leads.

Masking Tape (Cotton Tape)

2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering

machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-2.)

NOTE

Do not add the rotating and the back and forth directions force on the IC, until IC can move back and forth easily after desoldering the IC leads completely.

Fig. 3-1

Blower type IC desoldering machine

3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using a tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-3.)

NOTE

Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.

Blower type IC desoldering machine

Tweezers

4.5.Peel off the Masking Tape. Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-4.)

NOTE

Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical direction towards the IC pattern.

Fig. 3-3

Braided Shield Wire

Soldering Iron

Fig. 3-2

IC pattern

Fig. 3-4

B3-1

Page 39

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

INSTALLATION

1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.

(Refer to Fig. 3-5.)

Soldering Iron

Solder temporarily

Fig. 3-5

2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.

(Refer to Fig. 3-6.)

4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thintip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 3-8.)

Thin-tip Soldering Iron

Fig. 3-8

5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the IC using a magnifying glass. Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering position and installation position of the parts around the IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.

NOTE

When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be damaged. So, be always sure to replace the IC in this case.

Solder

Supply soldering from upper position to lower position

Soldering Iron

3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-7.)

NOTE

Do not absorb the solder to excess.

Soldering Iron

Braided Shield Wire

Fig. 3-6

Fig. 3-7

B3-2

Page 40

SERVICE MODE LIST

This unit provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.

To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit and on the remote control for more than a the standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)

Set

Condition

TV mode

DVD mode

(No disc)

DVD mode

(No disc)

TV mode

ALL mode

DVD mode

(No disc)

DVD mode

(No disc)

Set Key Operations

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

STOP 1 2 sec.

STOP 7 2 sec.

Remocon

Key

0 2 sec.

1 2 sec.

4 2 sec.

5 2 sec.

6 2 sec.

9 2 sec.

Standard

Time

2 sec.

Releasing of V-CHIP PASSWORD.

Initialization of factory TV data. NOTE:

Initialization of factory DVD data. NOTE: The function will only work without the setting of DVD disc at

DVD Write mode. Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”. NOTE:

POWER ON total hours are displayed on the screen. Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC. Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

Check of the SUM DATA and MICON VERSION on the screen. Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

Display of the Adjustment MENU on the screen. Refer to the "ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT" (On-Screen Display Adjustment).

Region setting.

DVD

Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”.

Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK. Refer to the “PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL”. NOTE:

If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such as the channel setting, and the POWER ON total hours.

DVD mode.

The function will only work without the setting of DVD disc at DVD mode.

Method

Press the following remocon keys continuously. SETUP SUBTITLE 3 AUDIO 0

The disk cannot be taken out. Refer to the “TRAY LOCK”.

C-1

Page 41

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS

JG176 Up-Date Disc

Ref. No.

JG176

Part No.

APJG176098

Parts Name

Up-Date Disc

Up-Date of the Firmware

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Confirm that the “No Disc” will be appeared on the screen.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (5) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

Press VOL. UP/DOWN button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.

NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set. When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.

Insert the Up-Date Disc. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)

Automatic read will start and "Firmware upgrade Please Wait" will be displayed on the screen.

At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.

NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or operate the keys on the unit and remocon. Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.

Remarks

After the Up-Date, Logo screen will appear.

Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.

After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (4) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

10.

The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.

Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.

11.

CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

12.

Press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

13.

Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.

No Disc

Turn off the power

14.

AAEJA6926A

When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.

A A E J A 6 9 2 6 A

Fixed

Release date (Example: 2006.9.26)

Released times on the same date

A = October B = November C = December

C-2

Page 42

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC

CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION

Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSIONcan be checked on the screen. Total hours are displayed in 16 system of notation.

NOTE:

If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0". Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding.

Turn on the POWER, and set to the TV mode. Set the VOLUME to minimum. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (8) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.

The each item value might be different according to each set.

INIT : 3836

ROM : 3B4E

VOLUME: 084E

DVP : 25C9

Initial setting data check sum.

Rom correction data check sum.

AUDIO External terminal Volume.

SCALER data check sum.

MICON Version

LCD ON 0000

OEC7148A-028

FIG. 1

POWER ON total hours.

= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value) + (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value) + (16 x tens digit value) + (ones digit value)

CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA

If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken to ensure correct data settings while making reference to INITIAL SETTING TABLE (Attached "INITIAL DATA").

Turn on the POWER, and set to the TV mode.

Set the VOLUME to minimum.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2.

ADDRESS DATA

INIT 0000 75

LCD ON 0000

OEC7148A-028

FIG. 2

ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through the ADDRESS until

Press RIGHT/LEFT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink". Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected.

Pressing RIGHT/LEFT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.

Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.

When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.

After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

Turn on the POWER.

Set the VOLUME to minimum.

10.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

11.

After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.

12.

The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.

C-3

Page 43

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.

CAUTION

•

Use an isolation transformer when performing any service on this chassis.

•

When removing a PCB or related component, after unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire back in its original position.

•

When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to the IC and Transistor).

Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical adjustments.

1. Patterm Generator

On-Screen Display Adjustment

1.2.Set the VOLUME to minimum. Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the channel button (9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds to display adjustment mode on the screen as shown in Fig. 1-1.

Function

Use the Channel UP/DOWN button or Channel button

01 H POSI OSD 175

(0-9) on the remote control to select the options shown in Fig. 1-2.

Press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control to end the adjustments.

To display the adjustment screen for TV, AV, CS mode, press the GAME button on the remote control to set to the GAME, press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the DVD mode, press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control. Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel (9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

Step No.

Fig. 1-1

FUNCTION

NO.

H POSI OSD

V POSI OSD

R DRIVE(N)

R CUT OFF(N)

G DRIVE(N)

G CUT OFF(N)

B DRIVE(N)

B CUT OFF(N)

R DRIVE(C)

R CUT OFF(C)

G DRIVE(C)

G CUT OFF(C)

B DRIVE(C)

B CUT OFF(C)

R DRIVE(W)

R CUT OFF(W)

G DRIVE(W)

G CUT OFF(W)

B DRIVE(W)

B CUT OFF(W)

H POSI

V POSI

FUNCTION

NO.

BAK LIGHT CENT

BAK LIGHT MAX

BAK LIGHT MIN

BRIGHT CENT

BRIGHT MAX

BRIGHT MIN

TINT

SHARP CENTER

SHARP MAX

SHARP MIN

CONTRAST CENTER(N)

CONTRAST MAX(N)

CONTRAST MIN(N)

COLOR CENT

COLOR MAX

COLOR MIN

CONTRAST CENTER(C)

CONTRAST MAX(C)

CONTRAST MIN(C)

CONTRAST CENTER(W)

CONTRAST MAX(W)

CONTRAST MIN(W)

Fig. 1-2

2. BASIC ADJUSTMENTS

2-1: CONTRAST MAX

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

1. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

2. to normal position. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

3. press the channel button (40) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX(C)". Press the LEFT/RIGTH button on the remote control until

4. the contrast step No. becomes "118" Receive a broadcast and check if the picture is normal.

5. Press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control to set to the AV mode. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

6. to normal position. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

7. press the channel button (40) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX(C)". Press the LEFT/RIGTH button on the remote control until

8. the contrast step No. becomes "110" Receive a broadcast and check if the picture is normal.

9. Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT input)

10. Press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control

11. to set to the CS mode.Then perform the above adjustments 6~9. Playback the DVD(480p) disc. (COMPONENT intput)

12. Press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control

13. to set to the CS mode.Then perform the above adjustments 6~9.

D-1

Page 44

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-2: WHITE BALANCE

Place the set in Aging Test for more than 15 minutes.

Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern Generator.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (03) on the remote control to select "R DRIVE(N)".

Press the CH. UP/DOWN button on the remote control to select the "R CUT OFF(N)", "B DRIVE(N)", "B CUT OFF(N)", "R DRIVE(C)", "R CUT OFF(C)", "B DRIVE(C)", "B CUT OFF(C)", "R DRIVE(W)", "R CUT OFF(W)", "B DRIVE(W)" or "B CUT OFF(W)".

Adjust the LEFT/RIGTH button on the remote control to whiten the R CUT OFF(N), B DRIVE(N), B CUT OFF(N), R DRIVE(C), R CUT OFF(C)", B DRIVE(C), B CUT OFF(C), R DRIVE(W), R CUT OFF(W), B DRIVE(W) and B CUT OFF(W) at each step tone sections equally.

Perform the above adjustments 5 and 6 until the white achieved.

2-3: BRIGHT CENTER

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 press the channel button (26) on the remote control to select "BRIGHT CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGTH button on the remote control until the white 2.7% is starting to be visible.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control to set to the AV mode. Then perform the above adjustments 2~4.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control to set to the CS mode. Then perform the above adjustments 2~4.

Playback the DVD(480p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

10.

Press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control to set to the CS mode. Then perform the above adjustments 2~4.

11.

Press the GAME button on the remote control to set to the GAME mode.

12.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 press the channel button (26) on the remote control to select "BRIGHT CENT".

13.

Press the LEFT/RIGTH button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "123".

14.

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the DVD mode.

15.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 press the channel button (26) on the remote control to select "BRIGHT CENT".

16.

Press the LEFT/RIGTH button on the remote control to set the same step numbers as the AV mode.

D-2

Page 45

)

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-4: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)

Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment items are set correctly referring below.

(TV/AV/CS/GAME/DVD)

TV AV

NO. FUNCTION Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No.

1 H POSI OSD 175 175 175 175 175 175

2 V POSI OSD 85 85 85 85 85 85

5 G DRIVE (N) 113 113 113 113 113 113

6 G CUTOFF (N) 121 121 121 121 121 121

11 G DRIVE (C) 122 122 123 123 122 122

12 G CUTOFF (C) 128 128 127 127 128 128

17 G DRIVE (W) 128 128 128 128 128 128

18 G CUTOFF (W) 130 130 128 128 130 130

21 H POSI 294 294 294 149 294 294

22 V POSI 73 73 71 87 73 74

23 BAK LIGHT CENT 70 70 70 70 70 70

24 BAK LIGHT MAX 255 255 255 255 255 255

25 BAK LIGHT MIN 00 00 00 00 00 00

26 BRIGHT CENT 134 134 134 134 123 134

27 BRIGHT MAX 170 170 170 180 170 170

28 BRIGHT MIN 60 60 60 60 60 60

29 TINT 131 128 135 140 128 128

33 CONTRAST CENTER(N) 70 70 70 70 70 70

34 CONTRAST MAX(N) 118 110 110 110 110 115

35 CONTRAST MIN(N) 50 50 50 50 50 50

36 COLOR CENT 55 70 75 70 70 67

37 COLOR MAX 127 127 127 127 127 127

38 COLOR MIN 00 00 00 00 00 00

39 CONTRAST CENTER(C) 70 70 70 70 70 70

40 CONTRAST MAX(C) 118 110 110 110 110 115

41 CONTRAST MIN(C) 50 50 50 50 50 50

42 CONTRAST CENTER(W

43 CONTRAST MAX(W) 115 107 107 107 107 115

44 CONTRAST MIN(W) 50 50 50 50 50 50

65 65 65 65 65 65

480i 480p GAME DVD

D-3

Page 46

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

3. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

LCD PANEL

DVD DECK

BACK LIGHT PCB

CP7003

CP7001

CD7001

CP7004

CP7002

CD2001

CD2301

CP7201

CP203

CP3201

CP801

CP202

CP204

DVD MT PCB

CP2303

CP2302

CP2301

CD501

SCALER PCB

CD7201

CD702

CD703

REMOCON PCB

CP2204

SIDE JACK PCB

AV PCB

TU001

J4202

CP301

OPERATION 2 PCB

CP3803

CP2251

CP4203

CD4204

CP4204

CP3804

CP3802

OPERATION PCB

CP2202

D-4

J4201

CD4202

SPEAKER

CP4402

CP2201

CP4401

CP4403

J4401

J4404

J4402

CD2201

J4405

J4403

Page 47

(LCD SECTION)

POWER DOES NOT TURN ON

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

IS F3801 BROKEN ?

IS THERE VOLTAGE AT PIN 7 OF Q3809 5V ?

YES

IS THERE VOLTAGE AT PIN 3 PIN OF IC3806 3.3V ?

YES

IS THERE VOLTAGE AT PIN 2 OF IC3809 MORE THAN 3V ?

YES

CHANGE F3801.

CHECK Q3809 AND

PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CHECK IC3806 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CHECK IC3809 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

YES

IS CP3804 AND CP3201 CONNECTED ?

YES

CHANGE AV PCB.

CONNECT CP3804 AND CP3201.

E-1

Page 48

THE PICTURE APPEARS, BUT THE AUDIO DOES NOT APPEAR. (AT RF MODE)

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

IS CP4403 AND CP4401 CONNECTED ?

YES

IS THERE SIGNAL AT PINS 1 AND 4 OF CP4403 ?

IS THERE SIGNAL AT PINS 2 AND 4 OF IC302 ?

IS THERE SIGNAL AT PINS 3 AND 30 OF IC301 ?

YES

CONNECT CP4403 AND CP4401.

CHANGE SP301.

CHECK IC302 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CHECK IC301 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

IS THERE SIGNAL AT PINS 28 AND 30 OF IC4201 ?

IS THERE SIGNAL AT PIN 14 OF TU001 ?

CHANGE TU001.

YES

CHECK IC4201 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CHECK IC901 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

E-2

Page 49

THE PICTURE DOES NOT APPEAR (1).

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES BACK LIGHT SHINE ?

YES

IS CD7201 CONNECTED ?

YES

IS THERE SIGNAL AT PINS 5, 6, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 15, 17 AND 18 OF CD7201 ?

IS THERE SIGNAL AT IC7201 ?

YES

CHECK THE CONNECTED OF CP3802 AND THE VOLTAGE PF PINS 1~3.

CONNECT CD7201.

CHANGE V2301.

CHANGE IC7201.

YES

CHECK IC801.

E-3

Page 50

THE PICTURE DOES NOT APPEAR (2).

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

IS THERE SIGNAL AT PIN 31 OF IC4201 ?

YES

IS CD4204 CONNECTED AND IS THERE SIGNAL AT PINS 1, 3 AND 5 ?

YES

IS THERE SIGNAL AT C829, C835 AND C850 ?

CHECK C829, C835, C850 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

YES

CHANGE IC4201 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CONNECT CD4204, CHANGE IC4201 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CHANGE IC801 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

E-4

Page 51

THE COLOR DOES NOT APPEAR.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

IS SETTING OF COLOR NORMAL ?

YES

IS THE COLOR SIGNAL RECEIVED ?

YES

IS THERE COLOR SIGNAL AT PINS 13 AND 31 OF IC801?

YES

CHANGE SCALER PCB.

CHANGE THE SETTING OF COLOR.

RECEIVE THE COLOR SIGNAL.

CHECK IC801 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

E-5

Page 52

ON SCREEN DISPLAY DOES NOT APPEAR.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

IS THERE SIGNAL AT PINS 2, 3, 4 AND 5 OF IC101 ?

YES

IS THERE SIGNAL AT PINS 57, 58, 59 AND 60 OF IC801 ?

YES

CHECK IC801 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CHECK IC101 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CHECK NR801 AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

E-6

Page 53

(DVD SECTION)

DOES NOT DISPLAY

DVD PICTURE

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES THIS DISPLAY

LOGO PICTURE ?

DOES THIS HAVE SIGNAL

AT PINS 151 AND 153 OF

IC4001 ?

DOES IC4001 GETS

P.CON+3.3V AND

P.CON+1.8V ?

CHECK P.CON+3.3V AND

P.CON+1.8V LINE.

YES

CHECK THE DISC.

CHECK PINS 9 AND 7 OF

CD703 AND PERIPHERAL

CIRCUIT.

CHANGE IC4001.

E-7

Page 54

DISC DOES NOT EJECT.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES OSD APPEAR ON THE SCREEN ?

YES

DOES THIS EJECT DISC AT CHANGE DVD DECK ?

YES

CHANGE DVD DECK.

IS REMOTE KEY SET EFFECTIVELY ?

YES

CHECK PINS 205 AND 206 OF

IC4001 AND PERIPHERAL

CIRCUIT.

DOES THIS HAVE

SIGNAL AT PINS 4

AND 5 OF CP2302 ?

YES

DOES THIS HAVE

SIGNAL AT PINS 1

AND 2 OF CP2302 ?

CHECK PINS 29 AND 30 OF

IC101 AND PERIPHERAL

CIRCUIT.

CHECK IC2301 AND

PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CHANGE IC2301.

YES

CHANGE IC4001.

E-8

Page 55

DOSE NOT PLAY DVD.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

CHANGE DVD DECK.

DOES THIS DISPLAY "INCORRECT DISC".

DOES THIS DISPLAY

READING MARK ?

YES

DOES DISC ROTATE ?

YES

DOES CD2001 CONNECT WITH CP2301 CORRECTLY ?

CONNECT CD2301.

CHANGE IC4001.

CHANGE DVD DECK.

YES

IS THEVOLTAGE BETWEEN JG017 AND JG018 LESS THAN 0.6V ?

YES

CHANGE IC4001.

E-9

Page 56

DOES NOT PLAY CD.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

CHANGE DVD DECK.

DOES THIS DISPLAY "INCORRECT DISC".

DOES THIS DISPLAY

READING MARK ?

YES

DOES DISC ROTATE ?

YES

DOES CD2001 CONNECT WITH CP2301 CORRECTLY ?

CONNECT CD2301.

CHANGE IC4001.

CHANGE DVD DECK.

YES

IS THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN JG019 AND JG018 LESS THAN 0.6V ?

YES

CHANGE IC4001.

E-10

Page 57

NO SOUND DVD/CD ANALOG AUDIO.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES THIS HAVE

SIGNAL AT PINS 3 AND

5 OF CD703 ?

DOES THIS HAVE

SIGNAL AT PINS 7 AND

8 OF IC8502 ?

DOES THIS HAVE SIGNAL

AT PINS 113, 115, 116

AND 118 OF IC4001 ?

CHANGE IC4001.

YES

REFER TO "LCD SECTION".

CHECK PINS 7 AND 8 OF

IC8502 AND PERIPHERAL

CIRCUIT.

CHANGE IC8502.

NO SOUND DVD/CD DIGITAL AUDIO.

DOES THIS HAVE

SIGNAL AT PIN 1 OF

CD703 ?

DOES THIS HAVE

SIGNAL AT PIN 110

OF IC4001 ?

CHANGE IC4001.

YES

CHECK J4202 AND

PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

CHECK IC4001 AND

PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT.

E-11

Page 58

F-2

(V)Y_VIDEO

(U)C_VIDEO

CD703

DEC_VIDEO_C

DEC_VIDEO_B

235

SPDIF-134

ZERO

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

IC8502

PCM1753DBQR

STEREO DAC IC

ASDATA0

ABCLK, ALRCLK,

ML, MC, MD,AMCLK,

IC4005

64M SDRAM

EM638165TS-7G

SD_A0~A11

SD_D0~D15

RAMDQM, CLK, WE#, CS1#, CAS#, RAS#, CS0#, SD_BA0

DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM

RF, A, B, C, D, E, F

DVD/CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD, VC

IC4001

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP IC

SPDL_SEN+/-

SPINDLE/SLED/

FOCUS/TRACK_PWM,

TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN,DRVSB

IC2301

LA6565VR-TLM-E

MOTOR DRIVE IC

ZR36882ELCG

HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW

HA0~A19,HD0~D15,MEMCS0, RD, WR

IC4007

FLASH 16M IC

SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

RESET

DUPRD1

TIN_SW

RX/RDY[I/O[0]]

IC3001

BA9743AFV-E2

2CH SW.REG.CONTROLLER IC

DVD_POWER-H

DM-3PBF

DVD LOADER

OPU

TR+/-, FO+/-,

MOT_LD+/-,

MOT_SLED+/-,

MOT_SPDL+/-

SPINDLE/

SLED

MOTOR

STEPING/

5 DVD_RESET

CD702

START_SW

TX/SSCCLK

RX/RDY

DVD_POWER-H

F-1

Page 59

J4405

AV-5A-67H

J4403

AV-5A-66H

SP301

S0407N03-A

1.5W + 1.5W

J4401

MSJ-2000_AG

HEAD PHONE JACK

P.CON+5V

LCD PANAL

J4404

AV-5A-68H

FRONT_A_IN_R

FRONT_A_IN_L

FRONT_V_IN

J4402

MDC-012V1-A_LR

FRONT_S_C/Y/L

IC302

LA42052-E

SOUND AMP IC

AUDIO R

AUDIO L

IC303

MIXER IC

NJM4580V(TE1)

L OUT

R OUT

TUNE CONTROL IC

IC301

AN5891SA-E1V

SW_AUDIO-R

SW_AUDIO-L

TU_VIDEO

TU001

TUNER_VIDEO

SCL

SDA

AFT

14 SIF OUT

SDA

USA STUDIO IC

TUNER_A_R

SCL

IC901

AN5832SA-E1V

TUNER_A_L

T7001

TRANS

INVERTER

DRIVE

Q7001

CRT-057

DRIVE

TRANS

INVERTER

Q7002

INVERTER

T7005

AW-HA284T

T7002

TRANS

CRT-057

DRIVE

TH30

IC7001

CONTROL IC

Q7003

T7003

TRANS

INVERTER

DRIVE

CRT-057

Q7004

T7006

TRANS

INVERTER

AW-HA284T

T7004

TRANS

CRT-057

INVERTER

AV BLOCK DIAGRAM

Q4201

AUDIO

J4405

AV-5A-67H

DVD_AUDIO_R

SPDIF_134

AV SW IC

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_A_OUT_L

IC4301

AUDIO_AMP IC

NJM4580M(TE1)

Q4302

MUTE SW

DVD_AUDIO_L

ZERO

IC4201

AN15853B-E1

AV_AUDIO_R

J4201

AV_AUDIO_L

CVBS_IN

D_PR

D_Y

D_PB

SCL1

SWITCH_CVBS

SW_VIDEO_C

SW_VIDEO_Y

AUDIO_MUTE

SDA1

AFT

LCD ON

POWER FALL

POWER_ON_H

LCD-H

POWER FALL

LCD-H

POWER_ON_H

V.IN

DVD

SCALER

POWER

F-3 F-4

Page 60

P.CON+6V_D

UNREG+12V_D

P.CON+5V_D

P.CON+A5V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

P.CON+1.8V_D

AT+5V

LCD+3.3V

POWER_ON_H

LCD_H

P.CON+5V

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+5V

P.CON+1.8V

F-6

IC3003

5V REG

KIA78D05F

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

FET

Q3007

Q3008

FET

IC3002

1.8V REG

PQ070XZ01ZPH

P.CON+9V

IC3805

P.CON+9V REG

P.CON+32V

P.CON32V REG

PQ090RDA1SZH

LCD BLOCK

IC3807

LA7995M-TLM

Q3809

AT+3.3V

AT3.3V REG

AT+5V FET

Q3808

IC3806

KIA78D33PI

IC3802

AL1015

5V CONTROL

LCD 3.3V REG

Q3805

IC3808

BA00BC0WT-V5

Q3803

P.CON+3.8V FET

IC3201

BA00BC0WFP-E2

P.CON+3.3V REG

P.CON+3.8V

IC3801

AL1015

3.3V CONTROL

IC3202

BD7820FP-E2

P.CON+1.8V REG

POWER_FAIL

IC3801

3.3V CONTROL

SOUND + B

AL1015

INVERTER V IN

Q3001

DVD BLOCK

AV BLOCK

UNREG+12V

F3001

GND

ADAPTER+12V

DVD POWER

IC3001

2CH SW REG

CONTROLLER

BA9743AFV-E2

F3801

J3801

DC JACK

DC-487AG-PBT2.0-5.5A

F-5

Page 61

345

F-8

LCD PANAL

POWER

CH DOWN

VOL DOWN

KEY A

VOL UP

OS2201

KEY B

CH UP

CP203

REMOCON

DVD_RX&RX

TRX/RDY(I/O(O))

START_SW

DVD_RESET

TX/SSCCL

DVD_TX&TX

DVD_POWER

START_SW

DVD_RESET

IC102

RESET IC

PST3229NR

RESET

IC7201

LVDS IC

ICSV385AGLFT

DVS

RGB 24 BIT DCLK1,

DHS,DEN

SCALER-H

IC3201

BA00BC0WFP_E2

P.CON+3.3 V_REG IC

P.CON+3.3 V

P.CON+1.8 V

P.CON+1.8 V_REG IC

IC3202

DB7820FP_E2

SCALER BLOCK DIAGRAM

IC101

MICON IC

OEC7148A

DVS

C.SYNC

4SI_CHIP_SE

4SI_SDA_IN

4S1_SCL

4SI_SDA_OUT

IC801

SCALER IC

R8A66605A71FP

SCL

EEP ROM IC 256K

SDA

IC199

AT24C256N-10SU-2.7

LCD-H

LCDON

POWER_FAIL

POWER_ON-H

AFT

SCL1

SDA1

AUDIO_MUTE

D_PR

D_Y

D_PB

SWITCH_CVBS

SWITCH_VIDEO_Y

SWITCH_VIDEO_C

F-7

Page 62

CEF174A

C211

C212

G-2

C7202

C7206

B801

C824

B803

B804

R876

R879

R878

R877

C856

C855

C858

C860

C857

R815

R816

C839

R864

C2801

C2806

R867

C895C894

C885

C2803

R865

C888

C883C881

R858

R857

R866

C876

R850

R852

R846

R848

R842

R844

R838

R839

R837

R840

R828

R826

R830

R825

R832

R822

C828

C822

C2805

C896

C2800

C897

R836

C899

C877

C2802

R835

R824

R823

C898

R829

R855

R821

R820

R818

C847

C841

C840

C827

C849

C848

C844

C834

C833

C832

C825

C817

C820

R853

R862

R834

R851

R833

R849

R831

R819

C843

C845

R847

R843

R845

R827

R841

R817

C842

R813

R808

R809

R812

R814

R807

C826

C813

L7201

C7201

C7207

C120

R139

R145

R101

R103

D102

R132

R133

R124

L7203

R125

R144

L7202

R146

W815

B802

R214

R213

R212

R201

R202

R215

R216

Q206

C213C201

R204

C215

R209

Q201

D103

C105

C113

C121

D106

R119

R118

R121

C118

C117

C115

C202

R111

R203

R107

C110

R105

R102

R110

R114

R115

C101

R112

R113

C126

R3217D3206

W825

C127

D107

R3216

D3207

R3208

R3212

R3219

C3214

C3213

C3208

C3209

D201

Q204

R211

C208

Q205

C209

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

C870

NR801

CP202

C2804

X801

R811

R860

R863

SCALER (TOP SIDE) SCALER (BOTTOM SIDE)

CEF174A

C818

W827

C861

C864

C868

C871

C875

C879

R859

W806

R854

R861

R881

R882

R880

C821

W804

C852

109

C891

NR807NR805

NR806

C850

C837

NR804

C815

C835

C819

C816

C846

C814

C829

IC801

163

R884

R883

W811

R886

R887

R885

R888

R889

NR803

NR802

C7221

C207

W803

C203

W805

C216

C214

C859

C831

C866

C872

C7208

C874

C882

C886

C7209

C887

C884

C893

C7204

R129

IC7201

R7202B7204

C7210

C7203 C7205

R205

R207

C204

Q207 Q202

C217

R218 R206

R142

R126

R127

R128

R130

NR7201

C7215

NR7202

C7212

C7219

R7204

R7203

R7201

R208

R217

R220

R219

Q208 Q203

C114

R106

R123

X101

R117

R116

IC101

C119

CP7201

CP102

C125

IC199

C107

C108

C7218

C7220

CP103 CP101

C128

C132

IC102

R143

R134

D108

R210

R3211

IC3201

IC3202

B3204

C3201

C3202

D202

B3203

R3221

CP203

C206

C3205

CP3201

R3222

R3229

B3202

B3206

C3210

C3215

CP204

C3204

CP801

B3205

G-1

Page 63

C4244_1

W017

W015

Q3803

W047

D3805

W049

C306

C309

CP301

W812

W016

C3825

W034

C003

W811

W841

CD4202

R4217

W014

C3842

W033

C4309

D301

R308

W066

L003

W041

C317

R303

W821

W077

C904

W826

R4218

W013

C4305

W059

L301

W006

C4257

W825

L4202

W827

W027

C4306

W056

W058

C319

W824

C903

W026

L4207

W024

W837

C4308

W057

W068

L4203

W025

W831

W023

CP3804

W054

W055

W073

W855

L901

C917

C914

W840

C4262

C4264

CMF082B

D3802

W039

D3809

W836

W018

W010

W004

W003

W002

W805

W853

C3805

W028

IC3805

W858

B4201

W012

C3810

C3808

C339

L001

F3801

L3803

C340

L4201

W008

W065

B4204

W001

W009

R3802

W079

HS301

W064

L3802

C3821

C325

W842

W843

J4201

W029

J3801

L3801

W834

W832

RISK OF FIRE - REPLACE AS MARKED .

C3849

W044

W062

W818

W817

C347

W816

C307

C328

C336

C005

R316

W060

C343

R3805

W822

J4202

W856

IC302

W061

C4210

SOLDER SIDE

PRINTED CIRCUIT BAORDS

AV/OPERATION/REMOCON/SIDE JACK (INSERTED PARTS)

W007

C3839

CP3802

L3805

C3820

W848

C345

C341

R319

C334

R3820

TU001

W814

W815

W075

W031

D3801

W032

W813

C901

W063

IC3808

W030

L3804

C324

C332

C337

C909

R3817

W045

C305

W810

W022

W053

R301

W078

W052

W072

R3830

R3815

C3826

W050

C3838

C3836

W070

W808

W809

C910

C916

W021

W020

IC3806

W051

C320

W071

L002

C905

W080

W036

R3824

R302

C304

C321

W851

C4250

W019

C3828C3829

W035

W069

C902

W829

W040

W854

L4206

W038

C4324

C4323

CP3803

D3810

C3847

W037

J4401

CP4204

C4310

C4307

D2202

CP4203

W852

W838

J4405

J4404

L4402

J4403

J4402

OS2201CP2204

W839

R4402

W844

C2205

CP2201

R4401

L4401

G-4

CEF176B

W074

SW2204_1SW2201_1SW2202_1

W042

SW2205_1SW2203_1

CP2202

CEF175B

CP4401

CP4403

CP4402

CEF177B

G-3

Page 64

R903

R4410

B4402

R4407

R907

C318 C316

C313 C310 C311

R3821

C3816

C4233 C4217 C4221 C4220 C4218

R906

IC303

R320

IC3802

C3817

B3805

R4215

C331 R321

C3841

Q4201

R328

C3848

R3806 C3814

R3813

Q3805

C4232 C4231 C4230 C4229 C4228

R323

R3811

R3803

R3812

B3808

C4222 C4234 C4236

C4204 R4205

R4207 R4210 R4213

R4212 C4208

R331

C3824

C3812 R3807 C3815 C3807

R3810

Q3809

R3808

C4214 C4224 C4223 C4219 C4235 C4227 C4226

R318 C329 C338

R327

R325

R3809

C3809 C3806

C4215

C4213

C4212

R329

R3804

C907

C906

C912 C913

C009

R007

R909

C915C911

C010

IC901

R908

R904

R901R004

R003 R902

R006

R4406

C4403

C4404

R4405

B4403

R4408

B4401

R4409

C4406

C4405

CEF177B

R322 C335 R326 R324

C344

C2203

CEF175B

R2203

Q4302

R4321

R4305R4304

Q4304 Q4305

R4323

R4313

R4309

R4307

C3803

R4327

R4322

Q4303

R4301

R4318 R4328 R4324 C4321 C4319 R4319 C4317

R4316

R4314

R2202

SOLDER SIDE

R2201

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

C2201

C2202

AV/OPERATION/REMOCON/SIDE JACK (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

IC3809

D3806

R3823

R3822

R3825

R3829

C3846

C3835

D3808

R4239

C4267

Q4206

R4238

R4233

R4223

C4266

R4236

Q4203

R4229

R4222

R2204

R2205

CEF176B

C315 C314 C312

C4304

R4320

C4315

C4322

R4312

R4310

R4317

C4314

IC4301

C4312

R4308 R4306

R4302 R4303

Q4301

CMF082B

R4243

Q4205

Q4204

R4230

R4228

R4231

R4240

Q4202

Q302

R4315

C350

C3837

IC3807

C3831

C3845

IC301

C302

C3827

R3831

B3807

Q3808

R3818

B3806

C3843

C3844

R3834R3835

C3840

R3833

R4237 R4234

C4254C4253

C4246

R4241

C4238 C4242 C4239 C4243

C4247 C4237

C4251

C301

C3830

R3819

R3828

C3834

Q3802

D3803

R3832

C4245

D3804

R3814

IC4201

C308

R3816

Q3801

IC3801

B3804

R4242

C4216 C4225

R307

C303

R005

R330

B3802

R314

B3801

C3804

R4211

C004

R333 R332

R315 C327 C330

C333

C326

R317

R338

C4207 R4202

C4209 R4203

R4208 C4202

B4202 R4209 C4203 B4203

C4206

R4214

B4206

Q301

Q306

B4205

Q304

Q303

R311

R335

R306

Q305

C3801 C3802

G-6

C4275

R334

G-5

Page 65

DEF092A

R2253

R2254

R2251

R2252

C8520

C4026

R4014

C4025

C4024

C4023

R4064

R4059

C4077

B4006

C4012

C4082

R4036

R4037

R4038

R4039

C4072

C4038

W810

C4022

B4004

C4020

C4019

C4018

D4005

R2255

C2301

W822

R4016

W842

C4034

R4072

R4018

R4023

R4012

R4045

R4001

C4035

R4042

W836

C4007

C4086

C4027

B4018

B4001

C4004

C4030

R4022

R4043

B4015

R4051

B4014

W840

C4002

C4013

D4002

B4016

C4010

C4014

D4003

W859

C2365

R2302

R2323

C2306

R4067

R2339

C2326

B2304

B2305

R2329

C2358

C2360

C2359

C2357

R2336

R2318

C2305

R2358

R2310

R2313

R2357

C2304

R2361

C2350

C4057

C4056

C4003

C4075

B4003

R2309

R2306

R2341

R2322

B4013

B4012

B4011

Q2305

W843

R2355

R2348

C2309

C2317

C2332

R2359

R2347

C2348

Q2304

R2346

C2347

R2356

Q2303

B2301 B2302

C3017

G-8

W818

DMF066A

SH8501

W847

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

CD702

L8502

W827

W824

W817

C4091

R4054 R4053

B4005

R4040

C4105

C4011_1

C4083_1

C4009_1

B4008

C4052_1

C4099

R4048

IC4005

C4041

C4040

C4050

DVD MT/OPERATION2 (TOP SIDE) DVD MT/OPERATION2 (BOTTOM SIDE)

DMF066A

CP2251

DEF092A

C8506C8509

CD703

W826

C8522

C8505

C4067_1

W854

C4062

C4064

C4078_1

C4047

C4046

C4045

B3001

C8507 C8504

W819

C8523

C8508

L8503

C4063_1

C4095

B4007

IC4007

C4016

C4017

C3024

C3021

D8510

C3015

D3003

C3022_1

B4002

C4071_1

C4076

W860

R4008

IC4001

105

R4071

C4031

B4010

R4027

R4058

C8519_1

B8503

C4028

R4024

C4029

R4025

R4026

R4021

R4019

R4020

C4098

C4081

IC8502

C8521_1

R8512

R8513

D8509

R3004

R3006

R3007

C3004

R3005

R3027R3029

L3002

C3020

IC3002

C3023_1

R4086

X4001

R3026

R3012

R3025

C3009

R3024

R3009

C3014

R3002

R3011

R3010

Q3002

R3020

R3022

R3021

R3023

Q3006 Q3005

Q3008

D3002

C3008

R3008

C3007

IC3001

C3002

C3006

C3005

L3003

C3018

R2333

W809

C2340_1

C4039

C4008

R4032

C4068

R4065

R4078

C4033

R4052

C4088

C4032

C4096

157

C4085

R2308

R2301

R4004

R4002

R2338

R4003

R4005

C2314_1

C4069_1

D4008

C2310_1

C2327_1

C2316_1

R4087

R3018

C3012

R3003

R3019

Q3001

R3001

C3025

R4089

R4063

R4061

R4060

R4062

R3016

R3013

Q3003 Q3004

R3015

R3014

F3001

CD501

C3032

L3004

C3001

Q3007

D3001

C3011

L3001

IC3003

Q2302 R2340

Q2301

R2332

C4001

B4009

C4070

R2305

R2335

R2320

C2307

R2328

R2353

R2350

C3016_1

C3019_1

C2318

C2341_1

C2328_1

C2346_1

C2331

R2360

CP2301_1

C2329_1

R2334

R2324

C2302

R2303

C2303

R2304

W861

R2307

D2303

D2304

R2319

R2321

CP2302

R2326

R2327

IC2301

R2342

R2349 R2352

C2313

R2337

CP2303

R2325

R2330

SW2251_2 SW2252_2 SW2253_2SW2254_2 SW2255_2

G-7

Page 66

CD2301

SOLDER SIDE

G-10

M2602 M2601

SW2

DED020A

CEF181A

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

R7056

R7055

R7054

R7053

R7052

R7051

R7050

R7049

CEF181A

R7048

R7047R7046

BACK LIGHT (TOP SIDE) BACK LIGHT (BOTTOM SIDE)

R7067

R7066

R7065

R7064

R7063

T7005

CP7003CP7001

R7062

R7061

R7060

R7057 R7058 R7059

D7004

R7072

R7074

D7005

C7005

C7002

R7023

C7025

R7020

R7004

R7001

T7002

L7002

T7001

Q7001Q7002Q7003Q7004

D7003

C7019

Q7005

C7016

C7008

IC7001

R7008

C7001

R7015

C7020

C7004

C7006

C7017

C7021

CD7001

F7001

C7022

C7018

R7014

R7012R7013

R7010R7011

C7012

R7006

C7003

C7015

R7009

C7011

R7007

C7009

R7005

L7001

C7010

C7007

D7006

R7016

D7002

D7001

R7003

C7024

R7022

C7013

R7070

C7023

R7019

R7068

T7003

T7004

R7034

R7030 R7032

R7028

R7033

R7029 R7031

R7025 R7027R7026

R7024

T7006

R7045

R7044

R7043

R7042

R7041

R7038 R7040

R7037 R7039R7035

R7036

CP7002 CP7004

G-9

Page 67

R4067

(250mA)

B4003

MMZ1608R102CT

(10mA)

MMZ1608R102CT

VDDAFERF

B4018

VDDPWM

MMZ1608R102CT

FACT_OFFSET

TACT_OFFSET

10K

+-1%

R4022

MMZ1608R102CT B4016

C4033 0.1 F

R4062 39K R4060 11K

R4061 11K C4002 0.1 F

R4087

R4065 4.7K

4.7K

R4038

R4036

VDDPWM3.3V

TRAY_OPEN

TRAY_CLOSE

FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE

10K

(130mA)

B4015

MMZ1608R102CT

B4005

MMZ1608R102CT

4.7K

0.1 F

C4007

B4001

MMZ1608R102CT

(10mA)

+1.8V

+3.3V

1.3

157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208

1.3

2.1

3.3

2.1

3.3

2.1

2.0

2.1

1.3

0.2

3.3

2.3 0 0

1.8

3.3 0 0

3.2

3.3 0 0

3.2

3.3 0 0

1.7

1.7 0

2.3

3.3

1.7

R4063 15K

3.3

4.7K

FROM/TO MEMORY

OPU_D

OPU_C

OPU_B

OPU_A

DRVSB

HOME

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW

DVD_CD

D4008

1SS355

TIN

R4023

R4045

GNDDACBS2

C H D J

E K F

SSCRXD

110

3.3

4.7K

R4032

HA0

R4001

1.6

GNDDACP

AVDD1

SVDD AVDD

AGND

VBGAP

CD_MD

CD_LD

AGND1

VDDC

GNDC

VDDP

GNDP

MEMCS(1)

3.3

3.3 NC

C4008

HA1

HA2

390 +-1%

3.3

1.600

RSET

C/B/U

RESOUT

DVD_MD

DVD_LD

AGNDREF

GPCI/O(32)

ICGPI/O(6) ICGPI/O(7)

VDD-IP

SLEDPULSE

PWMCO(2) PWMCO(3)

GNDPWM

PWMCO(4)

VDDPWM

GPCI/O(46)

PWMCO(0) DUPRD0 DUPTD0

MEMAD(15)

VDDP

3.0

0.1 F

HA15 DAC_VIDEO_C

HA4RFHA5

HA3

1.6

Y/R/V

CVBS/C

VDDDAC

ICGPCI/O(4) ICGPCI/O(5)

IDGPCI/O(3)

SPINDLEPULSE

IDGPCI/O(4)

MEMAD(14)

MEMAD(13)

MEMAD(16)

3.0

3.3

HA13

HA14 DAC_VIDEO_D

HA16 DAC_VIDEO_B

HA8

HA7

HA6

4.7K

R4018

3.3

1.6

VDDDAC

160

SSCTXD

208

MEMAD(12)

3.300.5

HD15

HA12 DAC_VIDEO_E

HA9

OPU_F

OPU_E

75 +-1%

R4002

75 +-1%

R4003

75 +-1%

R4004

75 +-1%

R4005

75 +-1%

R4086

1.2

Y/C

GNDDACD

CVBS/G/Y

RFNGA

159

158

DUPTD1

SSCCLK

207

206

MEMDA(15)

MEMAD(11)

MEMDA(7) 111213141516171819 22021222324

2.6

HA11

HD7

HA12

HA11

HA10

ABCLK

ALRCLK

AMCLK

RX/RDY[I/O[0]]

W827 W817

DUPTD1

(VR_CD)

(VR_DVD)

C4096

B4011

B4009

1SS355

IRRCV

FPCSTRB

R4052

DUPTD1MCDUPRD1

BOOT2

BOOT1

D4005

JG004

JG005

0.001

B4013

B4012

C4003

4.7K

1SS355

JG006

RESET

SPDIF

DUPRD1

RX/RDY[I/O[0]]

100P CH

C4091

(A_GND)

(D_GND)

(RF_GND)

C4085 0.001 B C4086 0.001 B

TP4025

C4032

0.001

MMZ1608R102CT

180P CH

C4057

MMZ1608R102CT

C4056 0.027 B

MMZ1608R102CT

0.027 B

MMZ1608R102CT

FS2

C4001 0.0039 B

FS1

D4003

JG032

DUPTD0

DUPRD0

P.CON+5V_D

JG007

JG008

JG009

R4051

(AFEGND)

B4014

1SS355

D4002

W859

R4078

4.7K

R4039

4.7K

R4037

C4105

0.1 F

C4072

476.3V KA

C4067_1

2206.3V KA

C4070

0.1 F

C4075

0.1 F

C4076

476.3V KA

C4071_1

RFINP RFINN

TP4026

10K +-1%

R4043

1006.3V KA

C4068

W840

4.7K

10P CH

(120mA)

B4002

VDDDAC

0.1 C4004

C4088 0.1 F

SGND

MMZ1608R102CT

4.7K

R4089

4.7K

SYS_MUTE

DAC_VIDEO_C

DAC_VIDEO_B

ASDATA0

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

P.CON+3.3V_D

OPU_A

OPU_B

OPU_C

OPU_D

SPDL_SENS-

OPU_E

SPDL_SENS+

OPU_F

JG022 JG023

CD_LD

DRVSB

TIN

DUPRD0 DUPTD0

JG029

JG030

C4038

JG001

DVD/CDPD DVD/CDPD

DVD_LD

(MUTE-L)

TOUT_SW

DVD_CD

TRAY_CLOSE TRAY_OPEN TRACK_PWM

SLED_PWM

SPINDLE_PWM

FOCUS_PWM

DUPRD1

DUPTD1

0.01 B

JG002

(DVD-L/CD-H)

JG003

(DVD MT PCB)

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

ABC D E F GH

SPDL_SENS-

SPDL_SENS+

DVD/CDPD

C4034

W836

001.6

1.6

GCLK

GNDDACD

RFP

157

DUPRD1

205

MEMAD(10)

GNDP

HA10 P-H/I-L

HA13

HA14

HA15

RESET

R4016

9P CH

X4001

R4042 100

1.8

MEMDA(14)

000

1.9

HD14

HA9

HA16 DVD_LD

HA17 CD_LD

TRACK_PWM

100

C4035

13P CH

R4012

27MHz

100GT02720

C4028 0.1 F

476.3V

3.3

VDDA

GNDA

RESET#

MEMAD(9)

MEMDA(6)

MEMAD(8)

HD6

HA8

HD0

HA18 SPINDLE_PWM

HA19 SLED_PWM

(RF_GND)

C4081

0.1 F

C4027 0.1 F

C4069_1

HOME HOME

3.3

VDDP

GNDP

MEMDA(5)

MEMDA(13)

2.1

2.003.3

HD13

HD5

HD3

HD1 FOCUS_PWM

HD2 GND

IDGPCI/O(2)

MEMAD(20)

C4010

HD4

FROM REGULATOR2

(A_GND)

(D_GND)

TP4009

TP4008

SYS_MUTE

TP4006

TP4005

TP4004

W842

C4029 0.1 F

TP4007

TP4010

R4072 33

R4020 100

R4021 100

R4019 33

0.1 F

C4030

JG028

(DJTDO)

(MIC_DET)

PM16 0

3.3

3.300

GPCI/O(31)

DJTO / GPCI/O(30) / VID(1)

DJTCK / ICGPCI/O(3) / VID(0)

MEMWR#

MEMDA(12)

VDDP

0.6

3.3

0.1 F

HD12

WR ML

HD5

HD6

HD7

(MUTEC)

I2C_DAT MD

(ICETMS)

(ICETDO)

(ICETCK)

3.3

1.8

GNDC

VDDC

GPCI/O(26)

IDGPI/O(1)

GPCI/O(27)

ICGPCI/O(2)

DJTDI / GPCI/O(29) / VID(2)

DJTMS / GPCI/O(28) / VID(3)

IC4001

ZR36882ELCG

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP IC

MEMAD(18)

MEMDA(10)

MEMDA(4)

VDDC

MEMDA(3)

GNDC

MEMAD(19)

MEMDA(11)

2526272829330313233343536373839440414243444546474849550

2.6

1.8

C4013

HD4 I2C_CLK MC

HD8

HD9

HD10

2.7

2.9

0.5

0.1 F

HD11

HA19 D1_1

HD10RDHA18

HD3 D1_2

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

MEMCS0

(PM11)

3.3

VDDP

GNDP

0.600.6

HD2

SD_A0

JG021

TP4017

3.3

GNDP

ICGPCI/O(1)

MEMAD(17)

MEMDA(2)

HA17

HD9

SD_A1

SD_A2

SD_A3

TP4018

3.3

VSYNC

HSYNC

MEMAD(7)

MEMDA(9)

2.7

HA7

SD_A4

SD_A5

C4031 0.01 B

4.7K

R4024

3.3

AIN

MEMDA(1)

0.6

HD1

HA6

SD_A6

R4025 220

AMCLK

VDDP-A2

MEMDA(8)

MEMAD(6)

0.4

HD8 IAMCLK AMCLK

SD_A7

SD_A8

RAMDAT(14)

100

SD_A9

R4026 220

1.701.7

GNDP-A2

MEMAD(5)

5.5

3.3

HA5

SD_A10

P.CON+3.3V_D

P.CON+5V_D

R4027 220

IABCLK ABCLK

1.6

ABCLK

ALRCLK

GNDP

RAMDAT(1)

101

102

RAMADD(4)

RAMADD(3)

535655

MEMDA(0)

VDDP

0.4

3.3

0.1 F

C4014

HD0 IALRCLK ALRCLK

HA4

SD_D0

SD_A11

P.CON+1.8V_D

C4098

R4058 220

JG024

1.1

GPAI/O

AOUT(0)

RAMDAT(15)

103

RAMADD(5)

MEMAD(4)

MEMRD#

000

HA3

RD ASDATA0

SD_D1

SD_D2

SD_D3

10P CH

R4071

B4010

1.600

AOUT(2)

AOUT(1)

RAMDAT(0)

104

RAMADD(2)

MEMAD(2)

MEMAD(3)

3.1

MEMCS0 SPDIF

HA2

SD_D4

SD_D5

SD_D6

(GND,D_GND)

150

MMZ1608R102CT

JG020

(PM1)

SPDIF

ICGPCI/O(0)

IDGPCI/O(0)

MEMAD(0)

MEMAD(1)

MEMCS(0)#

3.1

3.203.3

HA1 MIC_ON

HA0

SD_D7 GND

SD_D8

SD_D9

4.7K

R4014

C4026 0.1

3.300

105106107 108109 110111 112113114 115116 117118 119120121 122123 124125 126127128 129130 131132 133134135 136137 138139 140141142 143144 145146 147148149 150151 152153 154155156

GNDP

VDDP

GPCI/O(20)

101102103 104

100

RAMDAT(2) RAMDAT(13) VDDP RAMDAT(3) GNDC RAMDAT(12) VDDC RAMDAT(4) GNDP RAMDAT(11)

90 91 92 9394 9596 97 98 99

RAMDAT(5) RAMDAT(10) VDDP RAMDAT(6) RAMDAT(9) RAMDAT(7) GNDP RAMDAT(8) VDDPCLK PCLK

80 81 82 8384 8586 87 88 89

GNDPCLK RAMDQM RAMWE# VDDP RAMCAS# RAMRAS# RAMCS(1)# GNDP RAMBA(0) RAMCS(0)# RAMBA(1)

70 71 72 7374 7576 77 78 79

RAMADD(11) VDDP RAMADD(9) GNDC RAMADD(10) VDDC RAMADD(8) GNDP RAMADD(0) RAMADD(7)

60 61 62 6364 6566 67 68 69

RAMADD(1) VDDP RAMADD(6)

56 57 58 59 55

GNDP

VDD-IP

VDDP

53 54

5152

3.3

C4016 0.1 F

C4017 0.1 F

SD_D10

SD_D11

SD_D12

SD_D13

0 0

R4054

SD_D14

1.5

1.2

0.8

1.5

0.4

2.0

3.3

0.5

1.4

1.8

0.9

0.5

1.3

1.7

3.3

0.8

1.3

2.1

3.3

1.5

3.2

3.3

3.2

0.2

3.1

0.5

3.1

3.3

0.2

1.9

1.8

0.2

1.0

3.3

1.0

0.3

0.9

SD_D15

RAMCS0#

(250mA)

B4006

MMZ1608R102CT

0.1

0.1 F

R4053

SD_BA0

RAMCS1#

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

0.1

RAMDQM

10010V YK

C4083_1

0.1 F

C4082

MMZ1608R102CT

B4004

W810

C4020

10010V YK

C4078_1

0.1 F

C4077

RAMWE#

RAMCLK

C4025

C4024 0.1

C4023

C4022 0.1 F

R4059 100

C4019

C4018 0.1 F

10010V YK

0.1 F

C4012

C4011_1

PCB130

DMF066

(D_GND)

SD_D0

SD_D15 SD_D1

SD_D14 SD_D2 SD_D13

SD_D3

SD_D12

SD_D4

SD_D11 SD_D5

SD_D10

SD_D6 SD_D9 SD_D7

100

SD_D8

R4064

100

RAMCLK

R4008

RAMDQM RAMWE#

RAMCAS# RAMRAS# RAMCS1#

SD_BA0 RAMCS0#

SD_A11

SD_A9

SD_A10

SD_A8

SD_A0 SD_A7 SD_A1

SD_A6 SD_A2 SD_A5 SD_A3 SD_A4

H-2

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

ABC D E F GH

H-1

Page 68

C4047

0.1 F

3.3

0.3

0.2

1.9

3.1

A0A1A2

1.0

SD_A7 SD_A0

VDD

VSS 28 29330 31 32 33 34 35

1.0

0.9

SD_A5 SD_A2

SD_A4 SD_A3

BA1

A10/AP

0.2

SD_A8 SD_A10

0.8

DQ6

DQ9

SD_D9 SD_D6

C4041

RAMCS1#

C4046

0.1 F

3.3

1.3

DQ7

VDD

VSSQ

LDQM

VDDQ

DQ8

VSSNCUDQM

000

3.3

2.1

0.1 F

SD_D8 SD_D7

0.5

3.1

0.2

3.2

CAS

RASCSBA0

CLK

CKENCA11A9A8A7A6A5A4

36 37 38 39440 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49550 51 52 53 54

1.5

3.300.2

47K

R4048

SD_A11 SD_BA0

RAMDQM RAMWE#

RAMCLK RAMCAS#

C4050

3.3

1.5

DQ0

VDDQ

DQ15

VSSQ

1.201.5

SD_D15 SD_D0

0.1 F

0.8

DQ1

DQ14

SD_D14 SD_D1

0.4

DQ2

DQ13

2.0

C4040

SD_D13 SD_D2

0.5

6789

DQ3

VSSQ

VDDQ

DQ12

3.3

0.4

0.1 F

SD_D12 SD_D3

C4045

0.9

3.3

DQ4

VDDQ

DQ11

VSSQ

0.501.7

SD_D11 SD_D4

0.1 F

1.3

DQ5

DQ10

SD_D10 SD_D5

3.3 110111213141516171819 22021222324252627

VDD

64M SDRAM IC

IC4005 EM638165TS-7G

VSS

2206.3V YK

C4052_1

C4009_1

PCB130

DMF066

H-4

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

HA14

HA13

1.3

2.5

1.5

0.8

1.0

1.7 110111213141516171819 22021222324

A15

A14

A13

A12

56789

A11

A10

(DVD MT PCB)

A16

VSS

DQ15

DQ7

SD_D1

DQ14

1.3

1.9

0.7

HD15 HA12

HD14 HA10

HD7 HA11

SD_D2

SD_D4

SD_D5

SD_D8

SD_D3

SD_D6

SD_D7

VCCQ

IC4007 SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

FLASH IC 16M

MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

SD_A0

SD_A1

SD_A2

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

SD_A3

SD_A4

1.2

3.3

C4064

0.1 F

HA16 HA15

SD_A5

SD_A6

SD_A7

SD_A8

SD_A9

SD_D0

SD_A10

SD_A11

SD_D9

1.6

1.2

HD6 HA9

SD_D10

SD_D11

DQ6

SD_D12

1.5

0.6

HD13 HA8

SD_D13

DQ13

SD_D14

SD_D15

A19

DQ5

0.7

HD5 HA19

RAMCS0#

RAMCS1#

0.8

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

A20

DQ12

HD12

SD_BA0

3.3

1.6

RAMDQM

RAMWE#

WE#

DQ4

HD4 WR

RAMCLK

C4062

HA0

3.3

RESET

HA17 SD_A9 RAMCS0#

C4039

0.1 F

W860

1.6

1.4

0.7

0.1

RP#

VPP

VDD

DQ11

1.6

0.1 F

HD11 RAMDQM

HA1

HA2

HA3

HA4

1.6

A7A6A5A4A3A2A1

A18

HA8

A19

DQ10

1.3

HD10 HA19 RAMRAS#

HA9

HA10

A17

DQ2

DQ9

DQ1

DQ8

1.4

1.2

HD2 HA18

HA11

HA12

HA13

0.9

HD1 HA7

HD8 HA6 SD_A6 SD_A1

HD9

HD0

HD1

HD2

HA14

HA15

HA16

HA17

HA18

HA19

WP#

DQ3

1.6

HD3

HA5

HA6

HA7

HA3

2.5

1.7

1.3

1.6

DQ0

DE#

VSS

CE#

A0 25 26 27 28 29330 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39440 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

2.6

1.6

4.7K

2.6

2.5 1.6

R4040

2206.3V YK

C4063_1

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

B4008

HD0 HA5

RD HA4

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

HD8

HD9

HD10

HD11

HD12

STANDARD

FLASHCS HA2

HD15

HD13

HD14

HA0 HA1

MEMCS0

B4007

MMZ1608R102CT

FROM REGULATOR2

MMZ1608R102CT

P.CON+3.3V_D

C4095

C4099

0.01 B

MEMCS0

W854

D_GND

GND

RESET

FROM AUDIO/VIDEO

ABC D E F GH

H-3

Page 69

GND

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

ZERO

123456789

SPDIF-134

(CP203)

DVD_RESET

DVD_POWER

FROM/TO SYNC SEPA

CD702

CU260801

START_SW

TX/SSCCLK

RX/RDY(I/O(0))

12345

GND

(CP4203)

TO SWITCH/AMP

CD703

CU290702

GND

[U]C_VIDEO

GND

[V]Y_VIDEO

PCB130

DMF066

H-6H-5

W822

W824

TIN_SW

RESET

DVD_POWER_H

DUPRD1

DAC_B[V]Y_VIDEO

DAC_C[U]C_VIDEO

4706.3V YK

C8523

4706.3V YK

C8522

W818

C8505

DAC_VIDEO_C

W819

C8508

12P CH

DAC_VIDEO_B

L8503

150P CH

C8509

1uH 0305

150P CH

C8507

150P CH

C8506

L8502

12P CH

1uH 0305

150P CH

C8504

(DVD MT PCB)

AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

SH8501

TP00370-21

D_GND

10010V YK

C8519_1

C8520

0.1 F

B8503

MMZ1608R102CT

R8513

D8509 1SS355

SPDIF

ZERO

RX/RDY[I/O[0]]

W826

DAC_B[V]Y_VIDEO

DAC_C[U]C_VIDEO

W847

DVD_AUDIO_L DVD_AUDIO_L

DVD_AUDIO_R DVD_AUDIO_R

D8510

SYS_MUTE

1SS355

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

ALRCLK

ASDATA0

10010V YK

C8521_1

ABCLK

AMCLK

ZERO

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

R8512

2.2

1.61.11.64.92.52.4 234

5678

SCK

BCK

DATA

LRCK

DGND

ZEROL/NA

VDD

12 13 14 15 16

ZEROR/ZEROA

VCC

VCOM

VOUTL

10 11

2.4 3.3 0 0 0 3.3 1.7

AGND VOUTR

IC8502 PCM1753DBQR

STEREO DAC IC

MCMDML

RESET

AMCLK

DAC_VIDEO_C

DAC_VIDEO_B

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

ABC D E F GH

ABCLK

ALRCLK

ASDATA0

SYS_MUTE

DUPRD1

SPDIF

RX/RDY[I/O[0]]

A_GND

GND

FROM/TO REGULATOR2

P.CON+5V_D

DVD_POWER_H

D_GND

GND

TO MEMORY

RESET

TIN_SW

FROM MOTOR DRIVE

ABC D E F GH

Page 70

(DVD MT PCB)

DVD/CDPD

DVD_CD

DVD_LD

CD_LDRFOPU_A

OPU_B

OPU_C

OPU_D

OPU_E

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

OPU_F

HOME

GND

(RF_GND)

(D_GND)

C2318

476.3V KA

TOUT_SW

0.001 B

C2316_1

0.1 F

476.3V

TIN_SW

B2304

C2347

C2346_1

0.1 F

C2332

RF_A5V P.CON+A5V_D

TRACK_PWM

FOCUS_PWM

VDDPWM3.3V

P.CON+3.3V_D

MMZ1608R102CT

DRVSB

SPINDLE_PWM

SLED_PWM

FOCUS_PWM

476.3V KA

SPDL_SENS+

SPDL_SENS-

TRACK_PWM

0.1 F

C2326

C2327_1

TP2323

TRAY_CLOSE

TRAY_OPEN

TP2324

10K

R2334

TP2320

TO AUDIO/VIDEO

390

R2336

100 +-1%

R2309

R2313

TIN_SW

R2335 3.3K

1.2K

R2339

01.61.61.801.61.6000001.601.61.601.63.23.24.10

4.7K

R2327

TP2318

5.6K

R2326

R2324

33K

R2319

TP2319

15K

R2321

VC2

4.7K

R2310

4.7K

NCNC NC

4.7K

R2320

27K

R2305

R2338

NC NC NC NC NC

4.7K

75K

R2307

TP2322

R2301

10K

R2308

23242526272829

30313233343536373839

4041424344

10K

R2337

VIN2

VIN3

VIN4

FROM REGULATOR2

W861

TP2316

VIN2+

VIN2-

VIN3-

VO_OP

VIN-OP

VIN+OP

REG-IN

REG-OUT

VREF-OUT

VREF-IN

VIN4-

MUTE234

MUTE1

VCONT

S-GND

UNREG+12V_D

P.CON+A5V_D

R2330

P.CON+6V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

GND

(D_GND,M_GND)(M_GND)

TP2317

R2325

VIN 1

VIN1-A

VIN1+A

VCCS

VCC1

VD1+

VD1-

VD2-

VD2+

PGND1

PGND2

VD3-

VD3+

VD4-

VD4+

VLD+

VLD-

56789

VCC2

REV

FWD

1 1011121314151617 18 192 20 21 22

0 0 6.0 0 1.9 1.9 2.6 2.7 2.6 2.8 0 0 3.7 1.7 2.6 2.7 0 6.0 6.0 1.6 1.6 1.6

IC2301 LA6565VR-TLM-E

MOTOR DRIVE IC

R2302 100 +-1%

C2365 0.1 B

4.7K

R2328

6.8K

10010V YK

C2310_1

10010V YK

C2314_1

TP2315

TP2314

TP2313

C2313

0.1 B

0.1 F

C2301

0.1 B C2305

1SS355

D2304

1SS355

D2303

0.022 B

C2304

120

R2358

JG058

JG057

R2357 1K

C2306 0.1

C2302 0.1 B

1.2

R2329

C2307 0.1 B

1.2

R2323

C2303 0.1 B

R2304 2.2

R2303 2.2

PCB130

DMF066

MOT_SLED+

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SPDL+

FO-

FO+

TR-

TR+

MOT_LD+

MOT_LD-

H-8

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

MOTOR DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

ABC D E F GH

CD_LD

DVD_LD

DVD_CD

3.3K

R2346

Q2303

0.7

VR_DVD

476.3V KA

C2329_1

0.1 B

DSM2(06SD)

FROM/TO LOADER

CP2301_1

R2356

VR_CD

R2359

R2355

R2360

JG015

OPU_VREF

OPU_F

C2331

0.1 B JG012

GND

Vref

3456789

LD07T2-24ND-03

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

R2348

Q2305

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

0.2

JG014

JG013

JG026

OPU_E

OPU_D

VCC

3.3K

JG040

OPU_C

W843

DVD/CD

JG016

JG025

SW1(DVD/CD)

VRF(RF_OUT)

JG011

OPU_B

(VR_CD/VR_DVD)

DVD/CDPD

C2350

3.3K

R2347

0.7

Q2304

DVD/CD SW

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

0.1 B

C2348

476.3V KA

C2328_1

0.1 F

C2317

DVD/VR

0.1 F

JG010

CDLD

C2309

JG036

JG027

JG034

JG035

OPU_A

GND

LD(CD)

VR(CD)

PD/GND

VR COM

VR(DVD)

101112131415161718

JG018

R2306

JG017

DVDLD

JG037

LD(DVD)

R2318

6.8

DVD LD CTL

TP2309

TR+

JG056

GND

T DRV

2021222324

6.8 220

R2332

1.9

2.3

2.6

Q2301

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

B2301

TP2310

TP2311

TP2312

TR-

FO+

FO-

F RTN

T RTN

F DRV

TP2307

C2340_1

MMZ1608R102CT

DVDLD

UNREG+12V_D

TP2305

10010V YK

27K

TP2303

R2322

TP2304

CP2302

W809

100

R2333

C2341_1

10V

3.0

CD LD CTL

B2302

MMZ1608R102CT

CDLD

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW

100

R2353

10K

R2352

R2361

LD-

OPEN

GND(D)

00_6232_005_006_800+

TP2308

R2340

220

3.2

Q2302

KTA1544T-RTK/P

MOT_LD-

LD+

12345

6.8

MOT_LD+

4.7K

R2350

6.8

R2341

JG019

P.CON+3.3V_D

B2305

MMZ1608R102CT

TP2306

4.7K

R2342

CP2303

00_6232_006_006_800+

(D_GND)

R2349

SW(GND)

HOME

LIMIT SW

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SLED+

100

SLD+

SLD-

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SPDL+

SP1-

SP1+

12345

C2358

C2360

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

ARE

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

100P CH

C2359

100P CH

C2357

CAUTION

ABC D E F GH

H-7

Page 71

H-10

PCB130

DMF066

P.CON+5V_D

DVD_POWER_H

GND

UNREG+12V_D

P.CON+A5V_D

P.CON+6V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

DVD_POWER_H

(A_GND,D_GND)

UNREG+12V_D

TO MOTOR DRIVE

P.CON+6V_D

GND

(D_GND,M_GND)

TO MEMORY

P.CON+3.3V_D

GND

(D_GND)

P.CON+5V_D

P.CON+A5V_D

C3018

GND

(M_GND)

P.CON+3.3V_D

P.CON+1.8V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

GND

P.CON+5V_D

TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

(GND,D_GND)

P.CON+1.8V_D

GND

(GND,D_GND)

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

5.1

REG+5V IC

IC3003 KIA78D05F

0.1 F

C3012

L3001

100uH

SBPSC-11R310-101A

(DVD MT PCB)

REGULATOR2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

5678

6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

Q3007

123

V_IN V_OUTCOM

6.8K +-1%

R3018

33025V ZL

C3011

RB051L-40

D3001

11.9 6.9

11.9 11.9

1234

TPC8109(T2LORION_Q)

SWITCHING

5.6K

R3014

5.9

0.04

6.4

11.7

R3015

L3003

2.2uH 0305

6.02

Q3004

6.02

Q3003

2206.3V MHE

C3019_1

0.1 F

C3017

10016V MHE

C3016_1

1.8K +-1%

R3019

R3016

2SA1036K

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

560

R3013

B3001

BLM18PG121SN1D

D3003

RB051L-40

L3002

100uH

SBPSC-11R310-101A

5678

3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5

IC3002

PQ070XZ01ZPH

REG+1.8V IC

270 +-1%

R3024

RB051L-40

D3002

Q3008

SWITCHING

V_ADJ GND

V_OUT

V_IN V_C

C3014

0.1 F

1K +-1%

R3029

510 +-1%

R3027

3.0 1.93.0 1.3 0

12345

R3025

3306.3V ZL

C3020

3306.3V ZL

C3015

9.1

1234

TPC8109(T2LORION_Q)

11.9 11.9 11.9

10016V MHE

C3023_1

10016V MHE

0.1 F

C3021

2.7K +-1%

R3023

0.04

9.09.0 SW

Q3006

2SA1036K

9.6 9.6

11.7 SW

Q3005

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

R3022

5.6K

R3021

0.1 F

C3024

C3022_1

R3026

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

1.8K +-1%

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

ARE

L3004

TSL0808

F3001

5A 32V

(CP3808)

FROM POWER2

CD501

CU240701

ABC D E F GH

22uH

1206FA5A-T

DVD+12V

123

5A32V

0.1 B

4.92

Q3002

KRC102SRTK

C3005

68K

R3006

R3004

VCC

VOLTAGE

REF

C3004

R3007 56K

C3006

R3005

0.01

10K +-1%

0.1 B

C3002

2.5V OUT1

OUT2

10.2 OUT2

10111213141516

7.2

D.T.C

COMP2PWM

PWM

1.28V

0.9V COMP

2.5 0 1.2 1.2 1.7 1.3

AMP1

COMP

S.C.P

AMP2

ERROR

-INT

ERROR

1.8V

+INT

2.5V

COMP

D.T.C

U.V.L.O.

SCP

O.S.CRSLATCH

1UA

Q3001

0.1 B

C3025

33025V ZL

C3001

0.1 F

C3032

GND

KTA1664-Y-RTF/P

11.8

11.9

R3003

5.6K

11.2 0

R3002

10K

R3001

560

R3020

01.7 1.30.9 1.2 1.8

GND

9.51.4

OUT1

D.T.C

0.9V

FB1

C3008

0.01 B

RTCT

2345678

VREF

IC3001 BA9743AFV-E2 2CH SW.REG.CONTROLLER IC

C3009

56K

R3012

10K +-1%

R3009

18K +-1%

R3008

470P CH

C3007

68K

R3010

R3011

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

10K +-1%

5A 32V

5A 32V (F3001)

N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE

REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,

CAUTION

TYPE 1206FA-T.

:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE

:F3001 IS MANUFACTURED BY COOPER INDUSTRIES INC.,

ABC D E F GH

CAUTION

ATTENTION

H-9

Page 72

H-12

PCB280

DEF092

EVQ21505R

SW2255_2

SKIP-_2

6.8K

R2255

EVQ21505R

SW2254_2

SKIP+_2

(OPERATION2 PCB)

OPERATION2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

2.7K

R2254

EVQ21505R

SW2253_2

PLAY_2

R2253

1.5K EVQ21505R

SW2252_2

STOP_2

R2252

EVQ21505R

SW2251_2

EJECT_2

820

R2251

(CD2202)

GND

KEY1

CP2251

A2001WR2-2P

FROM/TO OPERATION/REMOCON

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

ABC D E F GH

H-11

Page 73

H-14H-13

PCBD20

CMF082

P.CON+9V

P.CON+5V

GND

SPIF_134

CVBS_IN

D_PR

D_PB

D_Y

AV_AUDIO_L

AV_AUDIO_R

DVD_AUDIO_L

DVD_AUDIO_R

ZERO

DVD_A_OUT_R

FROM POWER

FROM/TO AV SWITCH

DVD_A_OUT_L

(AV PCB)

JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

P.CON+5V

10K

R4301

P.CON+9V

Q4302

MUTE SW

C4315

R4312

R4310

2.6

KRC104SRTK

ZERO

CVBS_IN

AV_AUDIO_L

0.0015 B

10K

8.2K

R4304

3.2

R4317

100P CH

C4314

12K

R4315

C4309

R4308

4.7K

DVD_A_OUT_R

D_Y

AV_AUDIO_R

1050V NA

C4323

470

R4327

R_AUDIO DVD_AUDIO_R

10K

R4320

10K

5.85.85.8

1234

2250V YK

W837

470

Q4304

MUTE SW.

KRA101SRTK

5.0

D_PB

GND

1050V NA

C4324

470

R4328

C4321

L_AUDIO DVD_AUDIO_L

100K

R4322

A_GND

VCC

IC4301 NJM4580M(TE1)

AUDIO_AMP IC

2.250V KA

C4306

3.3K

R4305

5.0

-0.2

R4302

-0.3

Q4301

MUTE SW

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

D_PR

R4323

R4318

5678

5.8 5.8 5.8

8.9

DVD_A_OUT_L

100K

47K

C4310

R4309

Q4305

MUTE SW.

R4324

47K

R4321

C4317

2250V YK

470

2206.3V YK

C4305

KRC103SRTK

R4303

-0.3

10K

0.0015 B

0.1 B

C4312

10016V YK

C4308

P.CON+5V

12K

R4316

R4314

R4313

Q4303

MUTE SW

0.015 B

10K

R4319

10K

8.2K

10K

R4306

220P CH

C4304

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

SPIF_134

0.015 B

C4322

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTORCAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

100P CH

C4319

2.250V KA

C4307

10K

R4307

W836

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

ABC D E F GH

R4203

R4202

R4214

W805

B4206

FCM1608CF-600T06

B4203

FCM1608CF-600T06

B4205

FCM1608CF-600T06

H2 H1NC

B4202

FCM1608CF-600T06

H1 H1

10 23456

H2 H2

J4201

0.0056 B

C4209

0.0056 B

C4207

R4211

R4209

68P CH

C4203

68P CH

C4206

R4208

68P CH

C4202

AV6-57A03-03H

L4201

J4202

COAXIAL

R4215

100uH 0305

1.5K

R4212

4.9

D AUDIO DRIVER

C4204

B4204

RCA-117-01

1.8K

1.6

1.2

R4207

Q4201

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

0.1 B

W5RH3.5X5X1.0 H

3.3K

R4213

10016V YK

C4210

0.022 B

C4208

330

R4210

100K

R4205

W5RH3.5X5X1.0

B4201

100P CH

C4275

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

ABC D E F GH

Page 74

H-16

PCBD20

CMF082

SCL

SDA

AFT

TUNER_VIDEO

TUNER_A_R

TUNER_A_L

FROM/TO AV SWITCH

P.CON+32V

FROM POWER

P.CON+5V

SOUND_GND

GND

ARE

(AV PCB)

P.CON+5V

L901

100uH 0305

0.22 B

C915

0.1 B

C911

2.250V KA

1.2K

R906

1.2K

R907

0.3350V KA

171819

C916

3.53.52.902.2

3.3K

R904

20212223242526272829

4.750V KA

C910

C909

NC NC

2.250V KA

C905

303132

180K

2.9 1.5 4.3 1.7 0 3.9 2.2 2.2 2.2 0 5.0

R903

2.250V KA

C901

NC PILOT DET

NCNC 0

L+R REF

PLL

VCC

INPUT

SIF REF

STEREO REF

SDA/SAPID

GND

SCL/STID

AGC DET

ROUT

LOUT

L-R RBF

USA STEREO IC

R909

0000.30

0.033 B

SAP DET

C913

0.1 B

NOISE DET

C912

SIF/BB

MUTE

FOMO

NC NCNCNC NC

MODE

AGC SW

8 9

IIC/PARA

SPE FIL

SPE DEL

3.350V KA

SPE TIME

4567

C904

WB DET

1025V KA

2.8 0.5 2.4 2.3 5.0 0 0 0 3.4 3.4

WB TIME

C902

1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

IC901 AN5832SA-E1V

0.022 B

C907

SIF

C009

0.001 B

10010V YK

W824

C917

W855

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

2.250V KA

C914

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

0.1 B

C906

0.3350V KA

C903

ATTENTION

TUNER/STEREO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

P.CON+5V

L001

15uH 0305

ABC D E F GH

C004

0.1 B

TU001

115-V-LA35ARH

C005

NC+BNC

10006.3V YK

005.0

345

100

R901

100

R902

SCL

SDA

AFT

SCL

SDA

SIF

P.CON+32V

TUNER_VIDEO

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

100

R004

L002

R908

AUDIO OUT

SIF OUT

100uH 0305

10035V YK

C003

31.0

1.6

NC NC

+32V

VIDO OUT

W821

C010

68P CH

L003

12uH

W812

W811

W813

W814

W815

W810

W809

W808

W816

W817

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

100

R003

R007

100K

47K

R006

150K

R005

1.200

4.7

IF OUT

101112

SCL

SDA

2.400.17

AFT

ABC D E F GH

H-15

Page 75

H-18H-17

PCBD20

CMF082

2H0Q0801

W843

W842

W841

W840

AFT

FROM TUNER/STEREO

FROM/TO SOUND

SCL

SW_AUDIO_R

SDA

SW_AUDIO_L

AUDIO_MUTE

LCD-H

POWER_ON-H

FROM/TO POWER

POWER_FAIL

FROM/TO JACK

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_AUDIO_L

ZERO

SPIF_134

4.7K

R4243

(CD703)

[U]C_VIDEO

FROM AUDIO/VIDEO

CP4203

A2001WV2-9P

GND

[Y]Y_VIDEO

GND

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_AUDIO_R

ZERO

5.6K

R4237

123456789

SPDIF_134

Q4206

LEVEL SHIFT

100

R4239

100

R4238

(CP801)

FROM/TO SCALER

CP4204

00_6232_026_006_800+

3.3 G

2SK3018T106

5.0

Q4205

LEVEL SHIFT

2SK3018T106

5.6K

R4234

SDA

POWER_ON-H

POWER_FAIL

3.3

5.0

SCL

LCD-H

STAND-BY

3.3

L4207

LCDON

47uH 0305

EXT_MUTE-H

AUDIO_MUTE

STEREO_RESET

AFT

SCART1_Y

SCART1_SW

NCNCNC

47P CH

C4267

47P CH

C4266

151617181922021222324

AGC

SDA1

BUFFER

8.9

2.1

SCL1

GND

SCART_B or Pb

Q4204

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

1.5

Q4203

BUFFER

R4230

1011121314

GND

SCART_G & Y

W831

8.9

1.5

2.1

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

GND

SCART_R & Pr

1025V KA

C4264

1025V KA

C4262

3456789

GND

SWITCH_CVBS

SWITCH_VIDEO_Y

W829

R4231

GND

SWITCH_VIDEO_C

390

CD4204

R4236

R4233

W827

(AV PCB)

L4202

47uH 0305

AV SWITCH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

C4244_1

L4206

47uH 0305

R4218

S_SW_2

S_SW_1

470P CH

R4217

SDA

5.4

C4234

C4223

100 1/4W

3.504.7

SCL

7.5

4.7

TUNER_AUDIO_R

C4236

0.01 B

470P CH

C4219

GND

7.5

0.01 B

C4247

0.01 B

SW_A_R

7.5

5.4

TUNER_VIDEO

TUNER_AUDIO_L

C42241BC4225

C4214

470P CH

R4242

R4241

47P CH

C4254

C4253

47016V YK

C4245

C4246

470PCH

470P CH

C4239

C42421BC4243

C4238

DVD_A_IN_R

DVD_A_IN_L

192202122232425262728293303132333435

4.5

4.7

C4235

0.01 B

C4215

DVD_Y_IN

4.7

Vref

4.5

AV_AUDIO_R

C4227

470P CH

C4213

4.6

4.7

CVBS_IN

C4226

47P CH

DVD_C_IN

4.703.5

4.5

AV_AUDIO_L

C4222

C4212

5.7

C4216

C4237

47P CH

47uH 0305

L4203

0.01 B

4.5

R42281KR4229

SW_A_L

5.7

7 89

5.4

C42281BC42291BC4230

C4218

W826

SW_CVBS

6dB

SIDE_C_IN

47P CH

2216V KA

C4250

4.5

BIAS

7.5

SIDE_A_IN_R

C4220

BUFFER

W825

C4251

0.01 B

SW_Y

4.5

9.0

Vcc

6dB

456

5.405.4

7.5

SIDE_Y_IN

SIDE_A_IN_L

C42311BC4232

C4221

470P CH

47P CH

C4217

1025V KA

C4257

1.8

8.9

2.4

Q4202

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

R4240

SW_C

5.3

5.0

6dB

SIDE_CVBS

C4233

470P CH

NC 36

D_SW_1

D_L1_Vin

1 101112131415161718

47P CH

820

R4222

IC4201 AN15853B-E1AV SW IC

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

390

R4223

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

ABC D E F GH

GND

D_Y

D_PB

FROM JACK

D_PR

CVBS_IN

AV_AUDIO_R

AV_AUDIO_L

SCL

SDA

TUNER_A_R

FROM/TO TUNER/STEREO

TUNER_A_L

TUNER_VIDEO

(CP4402)

FROM OPERATION

SIDE JACK/REMOCON

CD4202

CU281101

GND

FRONT_V_IN

FRONT_A_IN_L

FRONT_A_IN_R

1234567

FRONT_S_Y

FRONT_S_C

FRONT_S_L

ABC D E F GH

AT+5V

LCDON DVD_AUDIO_R

AT+3.3V

P.CON+9V

FROM/TO POWER

Page 76

W851

(AV PCB)

SOUND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

Q304

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

MUTE SW

5.0

33K

R330

12K

R329

2216V KA

C340

0.22 B

820

C338

R327

1.8K

1234

2216V KA

C334

C329

120K

R318

1025V KA

C321

220K

R307

1025V KA

C305

R325

3.9K

R323

1025V KA

C320

0.01 B

C316

0.033 B

C313

C311

0.039

NC NC NC NC

C308

0.033 B

C303

0 4.8 4.8 4.8

120K 1/4W

R319

6.42.72.1004.14.704.14.14.30

NCNC

LT LB BD VD L ONT

PF4 GND

PF2 PF3

4 56789

NC NC

4.51.74.1 3

L INAGCPF1

1101112 13 14 15 16

100P CH

2235V NA

C325

0.1 B

C318

0.015 B

C310

Q306

MUTE SW

KRA101SRTK

R3321KR333

IC303

A_GND

/MUTE

Balance

2.2K

Volume

Control

Tone

Control

AGC SURR

5.0

R328

C337

NJM4580V(TE1)

MIXER IC

9.0

VCC

6.26.26.2

5678

171819

5.0 5.0

R OUT SDA SCL

20212223242526272829

NC NC

0 0 5.6

2.2

BLD TD

4.5 3.0

4.1

BB RB RT

NCNC

NC NC

0 0 4.9

4.0

303132

VCC VrefR IN

8.8

MODE

control

IC301 AN5891SA-E1V

2.6 4.5

TONE CONTROL IC

R303

39K 1/4W

H-20

CMF082

10010V YK

R334

0.1 B

C344

100 1/4W

5.0

Q303

MUTE SW

820

R326

C350

L301

MUTE SW

10K

C347

Q305

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

33K

R331

3.9K

R322

C331

2235V NA

C324

5.0

560P CH

5.0

1025V KA

C319

1025V KA

0.01 B

C315

C312

1025V KA

C309

1025V KA

C304

100uH 0305

2216V KA

C332

100P CH

120K

R321

Q302

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

C317

0.1 B

C314

22016V YK

C306

0.01 B

C302

W856

IC302

LA42052-E

SOUND AMP IC

1K 1/4W

R316

R314

123

GND

(CP4401)

SP OUT L

A2001WV2-4P-BLK

CP301

TO OPERATION/SIDE JACK/REMOCON

47016V YK

OUT1

PWR GND

OUT2

VCC

P.P

STBY

IN2

PRE GND

IN1

Ripple Filter

C345

11 12 1323456789

NC NC

47016V YK

C341

110

5.8 1.5 0 1.5 1.0 8.0 12.0 6.0 0 0 0 6.0 0

W858

C327

C326

R338

0.150V KA

C343

100025V FM

C339

4.750V

0.0047 B

C333

10016V YK

C328

1.5K

R317

HS16A

HS301

4.7K

R311

470

MUTE SW.

2.9

R306

763WAA0353

Q301

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

47K

SP OUT R

C336

1.5K

R315

150V KA

C307

0.0047 B

C330

1.5K

R335

5.0

12K

2216V KA

0.22 B

C335

1.8K

R324

120K

R320

D301

1SS133

R308

C301

PCBD20

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

ARE

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

ABC D E F GH

W818

W822

R302

2.7K 1/4W

R301

2.7K 1/4W

W848

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

SDA

SCL

SW_AUDIO_L

SW_AUDIO_R

AUDIO_MUTE

FROM/TO AV SWITCH

FROM POWER

AT+5V

P.CON+5V

SOUND+B

P.CON+9V

GND

SOUND_GND_1

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

ABC D E F GH

H-19

Page 77

H-22

TO SOUND

P.CON+9V

SOUND+B

P.CON+5V

AT+5V

GND

FROM/TO AV SWITCH

LCDON

AT+3.3V

AT+5V

P.CON+9V

POWER_ON-H

POWER_FAIL

LCD-H

GND

P.CON+5V

P.CON+32V

TO TUNER/STEREO

GND

SOUND_GND

TO JACK

P.CON+9V

P.CON+5V

GND

(CP3201)

TO REGULATOR

CP3804

A2001WV2-10P

47016V YK

C3842

1102345678

P.CON+9V

P.CON+5V

LCD+3.3V

AT+3.3V

P.CON+3.8V

GND

AT+5V

0.1 B

C3845

0.1 B

C3844

0.1 B

C3843

PCBD20

CMF082

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

ARE

4.750V KA

C3838

4.750V KA

C3836

C3834

0.47 F

234567

C3830

0.47 F

9.4 5.1 17.0 9.5 30.9 30.60

IC3807 LA7995M-TLM

0.01 B

C3827

4.7K 1/4W

R3820

10016V YK

C3820

(AV PCB)

C3837

0.47 F

150P

C3831

5.0 4.2 0 0 0 17.8 33.7

P.CON+9V_REG IC

IC3805 PQ090RDA1SZH

1011121314

CVCC COSC NC NC NC CP3CP3

10ERB20-TA1B2

D3805

ADJGNDOUTIN

1234

CP1 CP1 GND CP2 CP2 CREG COUT

P.CON32V REG IC

9.1 0 5.0

11.6

POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

10016V YK

C3821

C3824

P.CON+5V

AT+3.3V

1SS133

P.CON+3.8V

B3806

BLM18PG181SN1D

15uH

L3804

GND

5678

4.2 4.2

R3812

0.047 1/4W

B3802

BLM18PG181SN1D

D3808

1SS355

NC NC

56K

R3825

10K

R3821

BLM18PG181SN1D

B3804

Drain

Gate

Drain

Source

Drain

Source

Drain

Source

Q3805 RSS050P03

P.CON+3.8V FET

R3808

R3813

0.047 1/4W

68016V FM

C3810

NCNC

03.03.0

D3809

123

OUT IN GND

IC3809 PST3229NR

RESET IC

D3806

RB520S-30-TE61

MTZJ2.2B

D3810

4.5

Q3801

POWER ON SW

KRC103SRTK

68016V FM

C3825

EC31QS04

D3803

1234

0.01 B

11.5 11.5 11.5 7.5

C3816

7.5

11.5

EXT

GND

VIN

V5/PWON

Vref/SS

3.8V CONTROL IC

IC3801 AL1015

1234

4.5

11.5

C3841

C3809

0.22 B

0.022 B

1SS133

R3822

R3829

3.7

R3818

220 +-1%

R3815

+-1%

2.2K 1/4W

1.3

5678

1.2

1.3 27P CH

C3814

33K

R3806

150V YK

C3847

0.47 F

C3846

0.1 B

C3835

2.2K

R3823

3.9K

POWER ON SW

Q3802

KRC102SRTK

1K +-1%

R3814

0.1 B

C3806

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

P.CON+9V

220 +-1%

1.5K +-1%

R3834

R3835

1K +-1%

R3833

0.1 B

123

5.1 0 3.3

68016V FM

C3826

EC31QS04

D3804

220

R3819

R3817

3K 1/4W +-1%

1.2

6.3 5678

GND

EXT

Vref/SS

V5/PWON

1.2

1.4

4.5

C3812

0.022 B

10016V YK

C3839

C3840

33K

C3807

C3815

R3807

R3816

0.1 B

10K

R3832

10016V YK

C3829

10016V YK

C3828

1K +-1%

D3802

27P CH

5.1

IC3808

BA00BC0WT-V5

LCD 3.3V REG IC

12345

ON/OFF VIN GND VOUT VOUT

2.5 5.9 0 6.8

1K 1/4W

IC3806

KIA78D33PI

AT3.3V_REG IC

47uH

5.2

5678

DRAIN

SOURCE

GATE

6.3

11.5

R3811

R3810

0.047 1/4W

68016V FM

C3808

R3830

BLM18PG121SN1D

B3805

0.047 1/4W

5V CONTROL IC

IC3802 AL1015

C3817

0.01 B

C3848

IN GND OUT

11.5

VIN 1234

11.5

0.1 B

5.0

Q3808

R3828

KRC102SRTK

R3824

470 1/4W

B3808

KTA1281_Y

B3807

AT+5V FET

Q3809 RSS050P03

5.2

11.5

BLM18PG181SN1D

L3805

5.2

DRAIN

SOURCE

1234

11.5

R3809

0.047 1/4W

B3801

BLM18PG181SN1D

5.1 5.0 Q3803

22K

R3831

0.1 B

13W

R3805

W832

100016V FM

C3805

R3802

(CD7001)

TO INVERTER

CP3802

1K 1/4W

I-PWM

LCD ON/OFF

A2001WV2-8P

GND(B.L)

0.1 B

C3804

V IN

12345

ABC D E F GH

TO REGULATOR

W853

(CD501)

CP3803

A2001WV2-4P

L3803

22uH TSL0808

W854

TSL0808 10uH L3801

W838

W852

0.1 B

C3803

W834

C3849

F3801

0.001 B

5A 125V

20N_5000FS

GND

DVD+12V

123

0.1 B

C3801

C3802

0.1 B

L3802

22uH TSL0808

D3801

1SS133

22K

R3803

22K

R3804

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

(F3801)5A 125V

(F3801)

N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE

5A 125V

REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,

:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE

ABC D E F GH

123

DC JACK

J3801

DC-487AG-PBT2.0-5.5A

5A 125V

CAUTION

ATTENTION

H-21

Page 78

H-24H-23

PCBD90

CEF177

YELLOWWHITE

J4403

R4408

HNC

AV-5A-66H

NCNC

FRONT VIDEO JACK

C4404

47P CH

B4401

FCM1608CF-600T06

(SIDE JACK PCB)

(CD4202)

FRONT_A_IN_R

TO AV SWITCH

1234567

CP4402

A2001WV2-8P

J4404

HNC

AV-5A-68H

FRONT AUDIO L JACK

22uH

L4401

R4405

GND

FRONT_V_IN

FRONT_A_IN_L

C4406

FRONT_S_Y

FRONT_S_C

470P CH

FRONT_S_L

J4405

HNC

AV-5A-67H

L4402

R4406

RED

R4410

C4405

470P CH

B4402

22uH

FCM1608CF-600T06

560

R4407

J4401

MSJ-2000_AG

HEADPHONE JACK

J4402

MDC-012V1-A_LF

R4401

W839

R4402

150 1/2W

W844

R4409

B4403

150 1/2W

L303

FCM1608CF-600T06

12345

SPEAKER

HF70T22*10*14

C4403

100P CH

FROM SOUND

CP4403

A2502WV2-4P

(CP301)

CP4401

CU243201

SP301_1

SP OUT L

123

S0407N03-A

GND

123

GND

SP OUT R

ACCESSORY

AD001

BL001

11030096

HPN-01

CD3811

0G119903

TM101

076D0LB010

BT001

MNAAA(R03)

BT002

MNAAA(R03)

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

ARE

GND

SP OUT R

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

L2204

HF70T22*10*14

12345

(CP204)

REMOCON IN

FROM/TO SYNC SEPA

CU252001

CP2204

PCBDA0

CEF176

GND

STANDBY

AT+5V

P.CON+5V

(CP202)

TO SYNC SEPA

CP2201

CU230703

CD2201

KEY A

OPERATION/SIDE JACK/REMOCON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

390

R2205

390

(REMOCON PCB)

OS2201

ROM-V338TAO

123

Vout

ABC D E F GH

B+

GND

R2204

LTL-1BEFJ-002A

D2202

1006.3V KA

C2205

(OPERATION PCB)

KEY B

CH01014A

123

GND

(CP2251)

FROM OPERATION2

CP2202

CU220702

0.01 B

C2201

EVQ21505R

SW2204_1

POWER ON/OFF (15")

CEF175

C2203

PCB270

0.01 B

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

0.01 B

C2202

EVQ21505R

SW2205_1

CH DOWN

820

R2203

EVQ21505R

SW2203_1

CH UP

R2202

EVQ21505R

SW2202_1

VOL UP

EVQ21505R

SW2201_1 VOL DOWN

R2201

1.5K

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

GND

KEY1

ABC D E F GH

Page 79

AUDIO_MUTE

EXT_MUTE-H

JG107

JG106

EEPROM_SCL

EEPROM_SDA

R145

100

R139

C119

100

51525354

JG114

JG112

EEPROM_SDA

EEPROM_SCL

NC NC

56575859

EXT_MUTE-H

AUDIO_MUTE

HP_MUTE

VCC

60616263646566676869

2206.3V

3.2 0 0 0 3.4 3.2 3.2 3.2 002.752.75 000002.51 000000

C120

0.1 B VSS

SCART1_SW

SCART2_SW

SCART3_SW

NC NC NC

AGC

LCDON

707172737475

V_SYNC

NC NC

START_SW

76777879880818283848586878889990919293949596979899

3.203.203.2

C108

0.1 B

D102

UDZS5.6B

4.7K

R101

DVD_RESET

SCALER-H

START_SW

DVS

SCART1_Y

4.7K

R132

R133

(SCALER PCB)

MICON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

AGC

ROM WRITER

4.7K

R129

JG115

JG116

STEREO_RESET

HEADPHONE_IN

SC2_CVBS_OUT-H

SCART_AUDIO_SW

D_TUNER_AFT_L

D_TUNER_AFT_H

D_TUNER_SD_H

75 HP_IN

HDMI_RESET

DVD_RESET

JG102

C105

0.1 B

D103

UDZS5.6B

SCALER_RESET

CP103

PC_CONTROL

A2001WV2-7P

AT+3.3V

JG117

JG125

SD_SW1

SC2_AUDIO_OUT-H49

485047

76 SCALER-H

SCALER_RESET

S_DET

000

RESET

AT+3.3V

CHIP_SELECT

R106

SCALER_RESET

4SI_CHIP_SE

JG118

0000000

3.2

P50/^WRL/^WR

SCART3_SW

SW_SCART

3.2

JG103

JG124

4.7K

R103

IIC_OFF

4SI_SCL

4SI_SDA_IN

4SI_SDA_OUT

4SI_SCL

NCNCNC

3.200

VGA/YUV

HDMI/DVI

IC101

OEC7148A

MICON IC

IIC_OFF

LCD_H

3.2

LCD-H 4SI_SDA_IN

1234567

GND

4SI_SDA_OUT

R144

EPM

CVBS/PC

JG104

JG105

10K

R107

4.7K

JG119

NCNCNC

COMPONENT/HDMI

PANEL_ON

LCDON

3.2

C101

STAND-BY

LCDON

JG120

PDP_RLY

1.4

H-26H-25

PCBDS0

CEF174

45678

1102

GNDTXBUSY

ROM WRITER

MICON_DATA

CP102

A2001WV2-10P

123

GND

IIC_OFF

EEPROM_SCL

EEPROM_SDA

ROM WRITER

CP101

A2001WV2-4P

DVD_TX&TX

DVD_RX&RX

RTS0

00NC

R127

JG113

JG111

JG110

4.7K

R118

JG109

JG108

R116

NC NC

4.7K

R111

4.7K

RESET IC

100

R125

D108

CLK0

GND

3.4

123

OUT

IC102 PST3229NR

3.4

R134

RB520S-30-TE61

10K

R121

4.7K

R119

C117

0.1 B

P.CON+3.3V

10K

R126

100

R123

D107

RB520S-30-TE61

4.7K

D106

C121

16MHz

100GT01615

X101

2206.3V YK

C114

R117 4.7K

R115 4.7K

R114 4.7K

R113 4.7K

R112 4.7K

10K

R143

0.1 B

C127

100

R124

RB520S-30-TE61

0.1 B

C113

10K

R110

EEPROM_SCL

EEPROM_SDA

IIC_OFF

RTS0

CLK0

DVD_RX&RX

DVD_TX&TX

100

R146

W815

JG121

JG122

JG123

3.2

3.200000000

3.2

SCL2

SDA2

(CLK0)

(RTS0)

DVD_TX & TX

DVD_RX & RX

SCL1

SDA1

27NC28

SCALER_RESET

100

AVCC

AVSS

KEY-A

KEY-B

AFT

3.2

KEY-B

AFT

VREF

000

3.2

0.1 B

C110

2206.3V YK

C107

JG101

4.7K

R105

4.7K

R102

KEY-A

4.7K

R142

4.7K

R130

4.7K

R128

3.2

26 27 28 29330 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39440 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49550

LIGHT_CTL

LED-H

DVD POWER

SYNC_HD

POWER ON-H

POWER FAIL

REMOCON IN

VCC

XIN

VSS

XOUT

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 192 20 21 22 23 24 25

RESET

(32KHz_OUT)

(32KHz_IN)

CNVSS

BYTE

4SI_SCL

4SI_SDA_IN

4SI_SDA_OUT

4SI_CHIP_SE

C_SYNC

110

3.2 3.4 3.2 3.2 3.09 3.163.2 3.20000 3.3 3.33.2 3.2 3.2 3.20 000003.2

100

VCCRXCLK

GND

CNVSS

RESET

CNVSS

AT+5V

2.250V KA

C132

0.4750V KA

C128

0.01 B

C126

10010V YK

C125

SDA1

SCL1

STANDBY_LED

DVD_POWER

SYNC_HD

POWER_ON-H

POWER_FAIL

REMOCON_IN

18P CH

C118

18P CH

C115

CNVSS

4SI_SCL

4SI_SDA_IN

4SI_SDA_OUT

4SI_CHIP_SE

C_SYNC

3.3

VCC

3.3

5678

EEPROM_SCL

EEPROM_SDA

VSS

1234

TEST

SCL

SDA

0000

AT24C256N-10SU-2.7

IC199

EEP ROM IC 256K IC

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

AFT

AGC

SDA1

SCL1

FROM/TO SCALER

ABC D E F GH

DVS

SCART1_Y

SCALER_RESET

LCD-H

POWER_FAIL

POWER_ON-H

LCDON

STAND-BY

4SI_SCL

AUDIO_MUTE

EXT_MUTE-H

4SI_SDA_IN

4SI_SDA_OUT

4SI_CHIP_SE

C_SYNC

DVD_POWER

DVD_RX&RX

FROM/TO SYNC CEPA

START_SW

DVD_TX&TX

DVD_RESET

KEY-B

REMOCON_IN

STANDBY_LED

KEY-A

SYNC_HD

FROM/TO REGULATOR

SCALER-H

P.CON+3.3V

AT+5V

GND

AT+3.3V

ABC D E F GH

Page 80

H-28

PCBDS0

CEF174

DG4

DG5

DG6

DG7

DG8

DG9

DB2

DB3

DB4

DB5

DB6

DB7

DB8

DB9

DCLK1

DVS

DHS

DEN

P.CON+1.8V

P.CON+3.3V

AFT

AGC

FROM/TO MICON

DR2

DR3

DR4

DR5

DR6

DR7

DR8

DR9

DG2

SDA1

SCL1

SCART1_Y

SCALER_RESET

POWER_FAIL

POWER_ON-H

LCD-H

LCDON

STAND-BY

EXT_MUTE-H

AUDIO_MUTE

4SI_CHIP_SE

4SI_SDA_OUT

4SI_SDA_IN

4SI_SCL

DVS

TO LVDS

DR9

DR8

DR7

DR6

DG3

DG9

DG8

DG7

DG6

DG5

DG4

DG3

DR3

DB9

DB8

DB7

DB6

DB5

DB3

DR4

DB2

DG2

FROM REGULATOR

GND

P.CON+1.8V

B804

BLM18PG181SN1D

C897

NCNCNC

3.4

NC NC NC NC

C887 0.1 B

C886 0.1 B

NC NC

C884

NC NC NC NC

R853

10K

R849

10K

R845

10K

R841

R836 10K

R834 10K

R831 10K

R827 10K

R824 10K

R821 10K

R819 10K

R817 10K

C821

2206.3V YK

163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208209210211212213214215216

1.8

QBR2

QBR3

DVDD33

QBR5

QBR6

QBR7

QRR0

DVDDSD

3.4 DGND

DVDD33

3.4 QRR1

QRR2

QRR3

DVDD18

1.8 DGND

DVDD33

3.4 QRR4

QRR5

QRR6

QRR7

TSTCLK

3.3 QBLCA

QBLCB

QBLCC

QBLCD

DGND

DVDDSD

3.4 PXCLK

3.4 PXD00

3.4 PXD01

3.4 PXD02

3.4 PXD03

3.4 PXD04

3.4 PXD05

3.4

DVDD18

1.8

DGND

DVDD33

3.4 PXD06

3.4 PXD07

3.4 PXD10

3.4 PXD11

3.4 PXD12

3.4 PXD13

3.4 PXD14

3.4

DVDDSD

3.4 PXD15

3.4 PXD16

3.4 PXD17

3.4 PXD20

3.4 PXD21

3.4 PXD22

3.4

1.8

PXD24

PDX25 DVDD33 110

3.4

R812 10K

C824

0.1 B

R807 10K

0.1 B

C893

0.1 B

C882

10K

R862

0.1 B

C877

10K

R851 10K

R847 10K

R843 10K

0.1 B

C874

C872 0.1 B

10K

C866

0.1 B

C859

ANALOG+3.3V

DIGITAL+3.3V

R833 10K

R829 10K

0.1 B

R823 10K

R820 10K

R818 10K

C831

BLM18PG181SN1D

B802

B801

R835

2206.3V YK

BLM18PG181SN1D

(SCALER PCB)

SCALER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

P.CON+3.3V

GND

2206.3V YK

C2804

C898

0.1 B

3.4

00000

QGR6

QGR7

DGND

QBR0

QBR1

DVDD33

DGND

DVDD18

QBR4

163

164

165

PXD23

DVDD18

DGND

214

215

PDX27

PDX26

VDIN

HDIN/FBIN

DVDD33

DGND

3.4

R814 10K

R813 10K

C826

R809 10K

R808 10K

0.1 B

0.1

C899

C896 0.1 B

R887 10K

R888 10K

R889 10K

R883 10K

R886 10K

R885 10K

3.4

1.8000000

QGR0

QGR1

DGND

QGR2

QGR3

QGR4

VROD

VRMD

111213141516171819 22021222324

0.7

C842 0.1 B

C829 0.1 B

DVDD33

VIND

AVSSD2

AVDDD2

0.9

3.403.401.6

C825 0.1 B

DVDD18

AVDDD1

C814 0.1 B

AVSSD1

C843 0.1 B

C815

QCLKR

VRPC

VROC

1.1

C844 0.1 B

216

R884 10K

QGR5

VRPD

1.6

C840 0.1 B

0.1 B

1.2

C841 0.1 B

SW_CVBS

C2800

0.1 B

C2806 0.1 B

3.4

3.400

QRL5

QRL6

QRL7

VRMC

VINC

AVDDC2

0.7

1.3

3.403.403.401.6

C846 0.1B

C845 0.1 B

COMPONENT_PR

2206.3V YK

C813 0.1 B

NR802

3.4

QRL4

AVSSC2

C816 0.1 B

QRL3

AVDCC1

NR804

NR803

4D03WGJ0470T5E

3.4

1.803.4

QRL0

QRL1

QRL2

DGND

DVDD18

DVDD33

IC801

SCALER IC

R8A66605A71FP

AVSSC1

DVDD

DVSS

VRPB

VROB

VRMB

2526272829330313233343536373839440414243444546474849550

1.1

0.7

0.5

C832 0.1 B

C833 0.1 B

C834 0.1 B

C827

0.1 B

SW_VIDEO_C

LCD-H

STAND-BY DR2

POWER_FAIL DR5

POWER_ON-H

GND

4D03WGJ0470T5E

3.4

QBL4

QBL5

QBL5QBL6

QBL7

VIN1B

AVDDB2

VIN2B

AVSSB2

3.4

2.003.401.6

C837 0.1 B

C835 0.1 B

COMPONENT_PB

C819

0.1 B

LCDON

AUDIO_MUTE

C2801

NR805

4D03WGJ0470T5E

3.4

QBL2

QBL3

DVDD33

AVDDB1

AVSSB1

VRPA

C847 0.1 B

C817

0.1 B

EXT_MUTE-H DB4

DGND

VROA

1.1

C848 0.1 B

SCART1_Y

0.1 B

1.803.4

0.7

C849 0.1 B

C820

3.4

DVDD18

VRMA

0.5

AFT

C2802

3.4

QBL1

QBL0

VIN1A

AVDDA2

3.4

C850

SW_VIDEO_Y

0.1 B

AGC

C2805

0.1 B

NR806

4D03WGJ0470T5E

3.4

QGL5

QGL6

QGL7

QGL0

VIN2A

AVSSA2

VIN3A

1.301.3

C852

0.1 B

COMPONENT_Y

SDA1

SCL1

0.1 B

NR807

3.4

3.403.4

QGL4

DGND

DVDD33

DVDD18

106

107

DGND

DVDD18

AVDDA1

AVSSA1

SVSS

3.4

0.1 B

C822

0.1 B

W805

COMPONENT_PB

4D03WGJ0470T5E

3.4

QGL1

QGL2

QGL3

TEST1

DGND

108

MPWEL

DVDD33

DGND

RESET

QOECTL

51525354

3.403.7

3.7

R816 10K

0.1 B

C828

W804

COMPONENT_Y

COMPONENT_PR

W827

10K

R866

R867 10K

LPF1

HDIN2

3.3

R815 10K

SW_CVBS

C2803

3.401.503.4

109110111 112113 114115 116117118 119120 121122 123124125 126127 128129 130131132 133134 135136 137138139 140141 142143 144145146 147148 149150 151152153 154155 156157 158159160 161162

DVD33

TEST0

QCLKL QDRVVB

QDRVVA

QDRVHF

DVDDSD

101102103 104105 106107 108

DGND

100

DVDD33 QDRVHE

QDRVHD

QDRVHC

QDRVHB

DVDD18 DGND

DVDD33 QDRVHA/QDE

90 91 92 9394 9596 97 98 99

QH QE/PXCLK0 MDQ0_C656OUT0

MPSEL1

XOUT XIN MPSEL0

DGND

DVDDSD MDQ1/C656OUT1

80 81 82 8384 8586 87 88 89

MDQ2/C656OUT2

MDQ3/C656OUT3

MDQ4/C656OUT4

MDQ5/C656OUT5

MDQ6/C656OUT6

MDQ7/C656OUT7

MDQ8/C656IN0

MDQ9/C656IN1

MDQ10/C656IN2

DVDD18

70 71 72 7374 7576 77 78 79

DGND

DVDD33 MDQ11/C656IN3

MDQ12/C656IN4

MDQ13/C656IN5

MDQ14/C656IN6

MDQ15/C656IN7

DVDDSD MPAH/PCXLKI MPCE

60 61 62 6364 6566 67 68 69

MPOE MPWEL

56 57 58 59

VDIN2

DVDD33

3.4

P.CON+3.3V

202122

SW_VIDEO_Y

0.1 B

C895

R865

1.8

3.4

1.8

3.4

3.3

3.4

2.0

1.8

3.4

1.8

3.4 10K

3.4

3.7

3.4

3.5

3.2

1.8

10K

R811

W803

0.01 B

C894

B803

R832

10K

R826

C857

0.1 B

C839

SW_VIDEO_C

0.001 B

F-600T06 FCM1608C

C888 0.1 B

0.1 B

C885

0.1 B

C883

0.1 B

C881

R858 10K

R857 10K

R855 10K

0.1 B

C876

R850 10K

R846 10K

R842 10K

R839 10K

0.1 B

C871

C868 0.1 B

10K

R830

C864 0.1 B

0.1 B

2206.3V

C818

GND

0.1 B

C891

R864 47

DCLK1

R882

10K

R881 10K R880 10K

R879 10K

R878 10K R877 10K R876

10K

2.2 B C860

2.2 B

C858

10K R852

10K

R848

10K R844

10K R840 R838 10K

10K R837

10K

R828

10K

R825

10K

R822

C861

2.2 B

C856

2.2 B

C855

DEN

R863 47

DVS

R861 47

DHS

R860 47

R854

2206.3V YK

C870

NR801

150

R859

W806

X801

4D03WGJ0000T5E

54MHz

100YT05401

7P CH

C879

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

7P CH

C875

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

0.1 B

SCALER_RESET

4SI_SDA_OUT

4SI_CHIP_SE

4SI_SDA_IN

4SI_SCL

ABC D E F GH

GND

AGC

AFT

SCL1

LCD-H

LCDON

STAND-BY

(CP4204)

POWER_FAIL

POWER_ON-H

AUDIO_MUTE

FROM/TO AV SWITCH

CP801

00_6232_026_006_800+

STEREO_RESET

678

345

SDA1

EXT_MUTE-H

SCART1_Y

SCART1_SW

101112131415161718

SCART_G & Y

SCART_B or Pb

SWITCH_CVBS

SCART_R & Pr

1922021222324

SWITCH_VIDEO_C

SWITCH_VIDEO_Y

SW_CVBS

TO SYNC SEPA

COMPONENT_Y

ABC D E F GH

H-27

Page 81

H-30

CEF174

PCBDS0

DR6

3.3

TxIN4

TxIN3

IC7201

LVDS IC

(SCALER PCB)

LVDS SHEMATIC DIAGRAM

ICSV385AGLFT

Vcc

TxIN5

110111213141516171819 2202122232425262728

3.3

W811

DR9 DR5

DR3

3.3

GND

TxIN2

TxIN1

TxIN0

GND

TxIN7

3.3

DG2

3.3

DG3 DR2

TxIN8

6789

TxIN6

3.3

DR7 DR4

3.300

TxIN27

TxIN9

3.3

DG4 DR8

TO PANEL

LVDSGND

TxIN10

3.3

DG8

C7206

1.3

3.3

0.1 B

VDD +3.3V

For CPT,AUO 15" Panel

CP7201

A2006WR0-2X10P

NR7201

4D03WGJ0470T5E

1.2

1.3

TxOUT1-

TxOUT0+

TxOUT0-

Vcc

TxIN11

TxIN12

3.3

3.303.3

DG9

DG5

CD7201

DU20001A

3456789

GND

TXOUT0-

TXOUT0+

C7215

0.1 B

1.2

3.201.2

TxOUT1+

LVDSVcc

TxIN13

GND

DG6

V2301

LCD PANEL

CLAA150XP03

101112131415161718

GND

TX1OUT-

TX1OUT+

TX2OUT-

TX2out+

NR7202

4D03WGJ0470T5E

1.3

TxOUT2+

TxOUT2-

LVDSGND

TxIN14

TxIN15

TxIN16

3.3

DB2

DB8

DG7

GND

TXCLKOUT+

TXCLKOUT-

1.2

TxCLKOUT-

R-FB

GND

TX3OUT-

1.3

TxCLKOUT+

TxIN17

3.3

DB9

TX3OUT+

R7203

1.3

TxOUT3-

TxIN18

3.3

DB3

GND

0.1 B

C7221

C7210

10010V YK

C7220

2206.3V YK

C7218

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

0.1 B

180

R7201

L7203

NLC3225

2206.3V YK

C7209

47uHNLCV32T

2206.3V YK

C7208

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

R7204

1.2

TxOUT3+

TxIN19

3.3

DB4

LVDSGND

GND

PLLGND

TxIN20

3.3

DB5

C7212

0.1 B

3.303.3

PLLGND

PLLVcc

TxIN21

TxIN22

3.3

DB6

DB7

0.1 B

C7219

C7207

DCLK1

B7204

R7202

2.8

PWRDWN

TxIN23

3.3

0.1 B

FCM1608CF-600T06

100

3.3

TxCLKIN

Vcc

TxIN24 TxIN26

3.3

DHS DEN

3.3

DVS

29330 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39440 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49550 51 52 53 54 55 56

GND

TxIN25

0.1 B

C7204

ABC D E F GH

DR9

DR8

FROM SCALER

2206.3V YK

C7205

DR7

DR6

DR5

DR4

DR3

DR2

DG9

DG8

DG7

DG6

DG5

DG4

DG3

DG2

DB9

DB8

DB7

DB6

DB5

DB4

DB3

DB2

DHS

DVS

DEN

DCLK1

2206.3V YK

0.1 B

C7202

0.1 B

C7201

C7203

L7201

NLC3225

FROM REGULATOR

47uHNLCV32T

LCD+3.3V

P.CON+3.3V

L7202

NLC3225

47uHNLCV32T

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

GND

ABC D E F GH

H-29

Page 82

H-32H-31

PCBDS0

CEF174

12345

GND

RX/RDY(I/O(0))

DVD_RX&RX

TX/SSCCLK

D202

1SS355

START_SW

DVD_TX&TX

DVD_RESET

START_SW

DVD_RESET

R220

SYSNC_SEPA

DVD_POWER

SYNC_HD

1.0

Q208

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTORCAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

0.7

12345

GND

(CP2204)

STANDBY

AT+5V

P.CON+5V

REMOCON IN

A2001WV2-5P

CP204

FROM/TO OPERATION/SIDE JACK/REMOCON

D201

RB520S-30-TE61

5.1

5.2 0.3 SW

Q205

KRA104SRTK

390

R211

C209

C208

470P CH

123

GND

KEY B

(CP2201)

KEY A

FROM/TO MICON

A2001WV2-3P

CP202

FROM OPERATION/SIDE JACK/REMOCON

C212

470P CH

C211

470P CH

Q204

KRC103SRTK

5.1 0

4.7K

R210

1025V KA

C206

0.1 B

KEY-A

KEY-B

REMOCON_IN

STANDBY_LED

DVD_POWER

DVD_RESET

START_SW

DVD_TX&TX

R208

SYSNC_SEPA

DVD_RX&RX

C_SYNC

1.0

Q203

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

SYNC_HD

0.7

FROM SCALER

SW_CVBS

COMPONENT_Y

AT+5V

P.CON+5V

FROM REGULATOR

(CD702)

GND

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

CP203

A2001WV2-6P

(SCALER PCB)

SYNC SEPA SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

R207

4.7K

3.1

Q202

0.3

SYSNC_SEPA

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

820P CH

C204

12K

R206

R205

3.3K

R209

Q201

SYSNC_SEPA

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

5.1

220K

C207

R201

SW_CVBS

C203

0.1 B

C202

R204

12K

2.7K

1.5 R203

5.5

0.150V KA 820K

R202

330P CH

C201

R219

4.7K

3.1

Q207

0.3

SYSNC_SEPA

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

820P CH

C217

12K

R217

3.3K

SYSNC_SEPA

5.1

220K

R214

C216

R216

Q206

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

1.5

5.5

C214

0.150V KA

R212

COMPONENT_Y

12K

R218

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

0.1 B

C215

2.7K

R215

820K

R213

330P CH

C213

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

ABC D E F GH

Page 83

H-34H-33

PCBDS0

CEF174

(SCALER PCB)

REGULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

TO SCALER

LCD+3.3V

P.CON+3.3V

AT+3.3V

P.CON+5V

P.CON+1.8V

GND

FROM/TO MICON

GND

SCALER-H

P.CON+3.3V

GND

AT+3.3V

TO LVDS

AT+5V

BD7820FP-E2

IC3202

P.CON+1.8V_REG IC

AT+5V

P.CON+3.3V_REG IC

P.CON+3.3V

IC3201

BA00BC0WFP-E2

10K

LCD+3.3V

CTL IN GND OUT ADJ

R3208

GND

12 456

3.5 3.8 0 1.9 0.75

R3219

12 456

4.0 4.0 0 3.4 1.3

R3222

R3221

10K

SCALER-H

R3211

+-1%

1.2K

5.6K

3.3K

+-1%

TO SYNC SEPA

+-1%

220

P.CON+1.8V

R3229

+-1%

C3213

P.CON+3.3V

+-1%

R3212

W825

D3207

D3206

P.CON+5V

EC31QS04

2206.3V YK

C3210

C3208

AT+5V

2206.3V YK

C3215

C3214

560

R3217

560

R3216

C3209

GND

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ABC D E F GH

470P CH

ATTENTION

C3205

470P CH

C3204

470P CH

B3206

B3205

BLM18PG181SN1D

B3202

B3203

BLM18PG181SN1D

GND

AT+3.3V

AT+3.8V

P.CON+9V

P.CON+5V

LCD+3.3V

(CP3804)

FROM POWER

2345678

CP3201

CU2A1001

C3202

470P CH

C3201

B3204

BLM18PG181SN1D

GND

AT+5V

ARE

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

ABC D E F GH

Page 84

H-36H-35

PCB350

CEF181

CP7001 1565647-2

LOW

HIGH

CP7003 1565647-2

LOW

HIGH

CP7002 1565647-2

LOW

HIGH

CP7004 1565647-2

R7056

8.2K +-1%

R7067

8.2K +-1%

R7045

8.2K +-1%

R7034

R7057

470K

R7046

470K

R7035

470K

R7024

470K

R7052

R7041

R7063

470K

R7030

R7053

R7042

R7064

470K

R7031

R7054

R7043

R7065

470K

R7032

470K

R7066

470K

R7055

470K

R7044

470K

R7033

R7058

470K

R7047

470K

R7036

470K

R7025

R7059

470K

R7048

470K

R7037

470K

R7026

R7060

470K

R7049

470K

R7038

470K

R7027

R7061

470K

R7050

470K

R7039

470K

R7028

R7051

R7040

R7062

470K

R7029

R7074

430 +-1%

R7072

R7070

430 +-1%

R7068

430 +-1%

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

T7005 AW-HA284T

-0.4 NC

2345

T7001 CRT-057

8.1

(BACK LIGHT PCB)

INVERTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

ABC D E F GH

4A 48V

(CP3802)

FROM POWER

CD7001

CU283001

Q7001 FDS4685DRIVE

4A 48V

F7001

1206FA4A-T

V IN

12345

8.1

1234

11.9

V IN

GND(B.L)

-0.4

678

L7002

8.1

11.9

GND(B.L)

C7021

C7019

T7002 CRT-057

8.1

CRT-058

10 B

8.1

8.1 5678

6.6

11.9

0.001 B

10 B

C7010

10 B

C7007

10 B

C7006

10 B

C7004

L7003

I-PWM

LCD ON/OFF

-0.3

NC 2345

8.1

Q7002 FDS8449DRIVE

1234

W5T29X7.5X19

-0.3

8.1

0.001

C7018

T7006 AW-HA284T

-0.4

-0.4 0

2345

T7003 CRT-057

8.1

8.1 5678

DRIVE

Q7003 FDS4685

1234

2.3

11.9

0.001 B

C7013

8.1

11.9

C7015

L7001

C7022

8.1

CRT-058

10 B

8.1

11.9

0.001 B

-0.3

NC 2345

T7004 CRT-057

8.1

8.1 5678

Q7004 FDS8449DRIVE

1234

6.7

R7003

10K +-1%

-0.3

8.1

D7004

DAN202U

Q7005

V PROTECT

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

11.9

8.1 5678

2.4

C7016

R7008

100K +-1%

R7004

0.001 B

C7005

100K +-1%

R7001

0.001 B

C7002

C7001

123

D7003

DAN202U

10K

R7022

C7024

1.3

1.0

R7020

150K +-1%

13141516171819

11.96.62.32.401.8

6.7

68K +-1%

0.22 B

2021222324

C7008

0.6

3.50.41.53.5

0.001 B

R7023

C7025

0.01 B

0.001 B

1SS355

D7001

PD2

ND2

PD1

ND1

GND

SEL

ACT

FBV

FBI

VCON

HOLD

TH30

D7005

DAN202U

D7002

123

1SS355

IC7001

123

D7006

DAN202U

0.01 B

C7023

100K +-1%

R7019

3K +-1%

R7016

0.22 B

C7020

68K+-1%

R7015

R7012

R7010

47K +-1%

180K +-1%

100K

R7005

C7011

C7009

C7017

2.2K

R7014

2.2K +-1%

R7013

10K +-1%

R7011

100K

C7012

R7009

15K

4.7 B R7007

4.7M

R7006

0.01 B

C7003

VREG VCC

VCS

STBY

INS

TIME

3456789

SST

1 101112

NC 0 3.5 1.4 1.1 0 1.5 2.3 2.3 1.2 3.2 11.9 3.5

INVERTER CONTROL IC

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

ARE

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE 4A 48V (F7001)

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIREHAZARD,

CAUTION

TYPE 1206FA-T.

4A 48V (F7001)

REMPLACEZ SEULEMENT PAR UN FUSIBLE DU MEME TYPE

:POUR LA PROTECTION CONTINUE CONTRE LE RISQUE DU FEU,

:F7001 IS MANUFACTURED BY COOPER INDUSTRIES INC.,

ABC D E F GH

CAUTION

ATTENTION

4A 48V

Page 85

H-38H-37

SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(SW PCB)

ESE22MH22

SW2

CD2301

GND(SW)

2H061605

BCZ3B05

JCV9B12

M2601

M2602

FEED MOTOR(-)

FEED MOTOR(+)

SPINDLE MOTOR(+)

SPINDLE MOTOR(-)

PICK UO INNER LIMIT SWITCH

65432

PCB640

DED020

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

ARE

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

ABC D E F GH

CAUTION

ABC D E F GH

Page 86

GND

VCC

Vref

2423222120

242322212019181716151413121110

FFC

CD2001

CP2301_1

GND

VCC

Vref

SW1(DVD/CD)

VRF(RF_OUT)

181716151413121110

987654321

9876543

SW1(DVD/CD)

VRF(RF_OUT)

GND

ZERO

SPDIF-134

DVD_A_OUT_L

CD703

CP4203

GND

ZERO

SPDIF-134

DVD_A_OUT_L

GND

DVD_A_OUT_R

GND

DVD_A_OUT_R

VR COM

VR(DVD)

VR COM

VR(DVD)

[V]Y_VIDEO

MECHA

SLOT IN DVD

VR(CD)

GND

[U]C_VIDEO

987645321

GND

[U]C_VIDEO

DSM2

PU101

DLM1D29-31

GND

CV-VPU061A

OPTICAL PICK-UP

GND

LD(CD)

T DRV

LD(DVD)

PD/GND

9876543

987654321

181716151413121110

GND

LD(CD)

T DRV

LD(DVD)

PD/GND

ADAPTER+12V

CD501

CP3803

ADAPTER+12V

H-40

LOADING MOTOR

FFC

CD2301

CD7201

TO LCD PANEL

GND

TXOUT0-

SLD-

SW(GND)

LIMIT SW

65432

65421

65432

CP2303

SLD-

SW(GND)

LIMIT SW

V2301

GND

TX1OUT-

TXOUT0+

SLED MOTOR

SP1-

SLD+

SP1-

SLD+

LCD PANEL

987645321

GND

TX1OUT+

SP1+

TX2OUT-

TX2out+

GND

TXCLKOUT+

TXCLKOUT-

COMMAND TRANSMITTER

DMF066

PCB130

DVD MT PCB

GND

DVD_POWER

START_SW

DVD_RESET

TX/SSCCLK

RX/RDY(I/O(0))

65432

CD702

65432

2019181716151413121110

CP203

GND

TX3OUT-

TX3OUT+

START_SW

TX/SSCCLK

RX/RDY(I/O(0))

DVD_POWER

DVD_RESET

D2202

OS2201

TM101

B+

CEF176

ARE

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

123

GND

Vout

CP2204

CP204

L7003

GND

AT+5V

REMOCON IN

GND

AT+5V

REMOCON IN

PCBDA0

REMOCON PCB

STANDBY

P.CON+5V

54321

P.CON+5V

STANDBY

SPINDLE MOTOR

OPEN

LD-

LD+

54321

CP2302

OPEN

CP7201

GND(D)

LD-

GND(D)

VDD +3.3V

LD+

VDD +3.3V

F RTN

T RTN

F DRV

242322212019181716151413121110

2423222120

F RTN

T RTN

F DRV

GND

432

GND

H2H2

102 3 4

H1H1

567

J4201

H2H1 NC

J4202

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

COAXIAL

J3801

DC JACK

V IN

GND(B.L)

V IN

CP7002

GND(B.L)

HIGH

GND(B.L)

LOW

GND(B.L)

CP7003

LCD ON/OFF

8765432

LCD ON/OFF

LOW

HIGH

CP7004

L7003

CP7001

CP3802CD7001

HIGH

V IN

LOW

PCB350

CEF181

BACK LIGHT PCB

LOW

HIGH

JACK

FRONT VIDEO

J4403

HNC

CP3201

CP3804

LCD+3.3VLCD+3.3V

P.CON+9V

HEADPHONE JACK

YELLOW

CEF174

PCBDS0

SCALER PCB

P.CON+5V

AT+3.3V

P.CON+5V

J4401

L JACK

J4404

FRONT AUDIO

P.CON+3.8V

SIDE JACK PCB

HNC

GND

TU001

PCBD90

GND

CEF177

WHITE

GND

AT+5V

CP801

987645321

FFC

CD4204

987645321

CP4204

GND

AT+5V

NC+BNC

CD4202

CP4402

HNC

GND

IIC_OFF

EEPROM_SDA

EEPROM_SCL

432

CP101

FRONT_A_IN_R

CP102

LCD-H

LCDON

STAND-BY

POWER_ON-H

POWER_FAIL

STEREO_RESET

123456789

262524

222120

LCD-H

LCDON

STAND-BY

POWER_ON-H

POWER_FAIL

STEREO_RESET

345

GND

FRONT_S_Y

FRONT_S_C

FRONT_Y_IN

FRONT_A_IN_L

GND

FRONT_Y_IN

FRONT_S_Y

FRONT_S_C

FRONT_A_IN_L

RED

J4405

L303

GND

BUSY

AFT

SCART1_Y

SCART1_SW

AUDIO_MUTE

EXT_MUTE-H

9876543

10111213141516171819202122232425261

181716151413121110

SCART1_Y

SCART1_SW

EXT_MUTE-H

AUDIO_MUTE

NCNCNC

SP OUT L

FRONT_S_L

8765432

CP301

8765432

CP4401

SP OUT L

FRONT_S_L

SP OUT R

S_VIDEO

J4402

CP4403

GND

CLKRXVCC

RESET

CNVSS

987645321

CP103

AGC

SCL1

SDA1

GND

SCART_G & Y

SCART_B or Pb

181716151413121110

1011121314151617181920212223242526

9876543

AFT

AGC

SCL1

SDA1

GND

SCART_G & Y

SCART_B or Pb

101112

GND

AFT

SDA

SCL

IF OUT

GND

SP OUT R

432

GND

SP OUT R

GND

SP OUT L

432

123

GND

SCART_R & Pr

GND

SCART_R & Pr

AUDIO OUT

4SI_SCL

4SI_SDA_IN

4SI_SDA_OUT

GND

SWITCH_CVBS

222120

GND

SWITCH_CVBS

141516

SIF OUT

RESET

CHIP_SELECT

GND

SWITCH_VIDEO_Y

GND

SWITCH_VIDEO_Y

+32V

AV PCB

PCBD20

AT+3.3V

7654321

GND

SWITCH_VIDEO_C

262524

2345678

GND

SWITCH_VIDEO_C

VIDO OUT

CMF082

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

GND

KEYA

KEYB

CP202

321

CD2201

321

CP2201

GND

KEYB

KEYA

CP2202

CP2251

CEF175

PCB270

OPERATION PCB

GND

KEY1

GND

KEY1

DEF092

PCB280

OPERATION 2 PCB

ATTENTION

THE TIMETHIS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST ATNOTE:

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

ABC D E F GH

SPEAKER

SP301

ABC D E F GH

H-39

Page 87

JACK

WAVEFORMS

AV SWITCH

2ms

0.5V

2ms

0.5V

TUNER/STEREO

10μs

0.5V

2ms

200mV

2ms

200mV

2ms

200mV

50μs

1.0V

SOUND

2ms

50mV

2ms

50mV

2ms

0.5V

2ms

0.5V

2ms

200mV

0.5ms

1.0V

1ms

200mV

1ms

200mV

NOTE:

The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding balloon number in the schematic diagram.

I-1

Page 88

WAVEFORMS

MICON

50ns

500mV

SCALER

10μs

100mV

10μs

200mV

20μs

500mV

20μs

500mV

20μs

500mV

SOUND

2ms

50mV

2ms

50mV

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

10ns

100mV

10μs

100mV

20μs

500mV

10μs

2.0V

LVDS

10ms

100mV

5ns

20mV

20ns

1.0V

NOTE:

The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding balloon number in the schematic diagram.

I-2

Page 89

WAVEFORMS

200ns

1.0V

MEMORY

5ns

500mV

AUDIO/VIDEO

500μs

500mV

10μs

200mV

REGULATOR 2

2μs

2.0V

2μs

2.0V

10μs

2.0V

10μs

2.0V

10μs

5.0V

500μs

500mV

10μs

200mV

INVERTER

10μs

2.0V

10μs

2.0V

10μs

5.0V

10μs

50.0V

NOTE:

The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding balloon number in the schematic diagram.

I-3

Page 90

WAVEFORMS

10μs

50.0V

10μs

50.0V

10μs

50.0V

10μs

500V

10μs

500V

10μs

500V

10μs

500V

NOTE:

The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding balloon number in the schematic diagram.

I-4

Page 91

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

209

110

209

103C

209

121

209

109

209

103D

103A

111

209

107

103B

103

101I

202

125

101E

101J

202

153

101F

202

PCBDA0 (REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)

125

202

101C

153

101D

101G

153

101E

101H

101A

101

PCB270 (OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)

202

101B

202

101J

101I

121

PCB280 (OPERATION 2 PCB ASS'Y)

202

124

138

123

202

138

202

125

NOTE: 153 is not included in Front cabi Ass'y.

202

105

202

105

202

125

J1-1

Page 92

206

211

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

108

211

PCBDS0 (SCALER PCB ASS'Y)

NOTE: 104 is not included in Stand Ass'y.

102

202

102E

202

201

102C

104

202

201

202

201

202

102C

202

102D

201

204

206

202

205

206

133

202

139

137

135

206

135

206

116

PCBD90

106

(SIDE JACK PCB ASS'Y)

115

120

134

137

139

206

202

205

206

139

136

135

206

117

138

PCB130 (DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)

202

201

202

126

205

206

106

202

206

106

102A

205

114

210

127

202

206

132

201

206

130

102B

206

208

206

131

113

203

PCBD20 (AV PCB ASS'Y)

206

118

206

207

112

206

207

128

206

118

119

106

212

206

129

206

208

206

207

122

PCB350 (BACK LIGHT PCB ASS'Y)

J1-2

Page 93

CD3811

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

(PACKING DIAGRAM)

TM101

148

145

AD001

BL001

140

149, 150, 151, 152

142

141

147

146

140

143

144

143

J1-3

Page 94

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW

605

703

600

605

703

608

CD2001

603

701

702

607

M2602

702

601

608

606

703

Do not replace the parts. Because, minute adjustments are needed if this condition is disassembled further more. If the repair is needed, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

CLASS

GREASE

MARK

602

SW2

705

604

704

PCB640 (SW PCB ASS'Y)

CD2301

NOTE:

Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section. Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

J2-1

Page 95

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

101 AE009346 7A701A979A FRONT CABI ASS'Y 101A AE009347 701WPJD526 CABINET FRONT 101B AE008446 702WPA1240 COVER HINGE 101C AE008447 713WPAA246 GLASS LED 101D AE004502 7235490047 BADGE BRAND 101E AE008448 735WPE0057 BUTTON CAP 101F AE008449 738WPA0208 BUTTON FRAME-TV 101G AE008450 738WPA0209 BUTTON FRAME-DVD 101H AE008451 752WSA0576 SHIELD BUTTON 101I AE003760 800WQ0A046 FELT SHEET 101J AE008452 800WQ0A116 FELT SHEET

102 AE008453 7A7040016A STAND ASS'Y 102A AE008454 704WPBA007 STAND 102B AE007736 761WSB0008 ANGLE STAND 102C AE007737 800WFA0078 CUSHION LEG 102D AE007710 89900FB118 BAND 102E AE007711 899000NK4N CABLE CLAMPS

103 AE008709 7A7020083B BACK CABI ASS'Y 103A AE008456 702WPJ0053 CABINET BACK 103B AE008457 704WPE0003 SLOT DVD 103C AE008458 706WPBA004 COVER CONNECTOR 103D AE008459 800WQ00105 FELT SHEET

104 AE008460 706JSA0015 HINGE ASS'Y 105 AE008461 709WPA0041 HOLDER BOSS 106 BZ710039 8995034000 CORD CLIP UL CO. 107 AE009348 722549A713 SHEET RATING 108 AE008472 752WSA0596 SHIELD SCALER 109 AE008464 7230008127 SHEET JACK-2

110 AE008465 7230008128 SHEET JACK-SIDE 111 AE008466 7230008188 SHEET JACK-1 112 AE005122 726000A073 SHEET CAUTION 113 AE008467 752WSA0577 SHIELD JACK-1 114 AE008468 752WSA0578 SHIELD JACK-2 115 AE008469 752WSA0579 SHIELD JACK-SIDE 116 AE008678 752WSA0607 SHIELD MPEG 117 75003866 752WSA0612 SHIELD FFC 118 AE007881 8965TS2045 CUSHION W6/H2/L45 119 AE008958 752WSA0637 SHIELD INVERTER

120 AE007170 753WEA0019 SHEET CU 121 AE008474 753WEA0038 SHEET CU 122 AE008475 753WEA0039 SHEET CU 123 AE008476 761WPA0430 HOLDER PCB-DVD 124 AE008477 761WPA0442 HOLDER PCB-TV 125 AE004527 761WSA0167 ANGLE SPEAKER 126 AE008478 761WSA0358 COVER LCD 127 AE008479 761WSA0359 ANGLE HINGE 128 AE008712 761WSAA048 ANGLE BACK 129 75003876 761WSA0401 ANGLE DECK-L

130 75003877 761WSA0402 ANGLE DECK-R 131 AE008483 771WPBA009 PLATE JACK-1 132 AE008484 771WPBA010 PLATE JACK-2 133 AE008485 771WPBA011 PLATE JACK-SIDE 134 AE005380 800WF00063 CUSHION 135 AE007725 890MP2401A TAPE 50*35 136 AE008486 890MP2401B TAPE 100*12 137 AE005521 8965TS0415 CUSHION 65TS4-2(15*50*16) 138 AE001853 8965TS1017 CUSHION 65TS10-10(17.5*20*14) 139 AE007880 8965TS202A CUSHION 65TS20-20(20*15*12)

K1-1

Page 96

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

140 AE009349 723000D690 SHEET BARCODE 141 AE002901 791WHDA001 LAMIFILM BAG 142 AE008488 792WHA0666 PACKAGE TOP 143 AE008489 792WHA0667 PACKAGE BOTTOM 144 AE008490 792WHA0683 PACKAGE PAD 145 AE008491 792WHA0687 PACKAGE PAD 146 AE009350 793WCDD569 GIFT BOX 147 AE008493 795WCAA496 PAD 148 AE007894 797WCA0040 ADAPTER BOX 149 AE007590 JB5ND300 POLYBAG INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION)

150 AE007852 J5N00629A INFORMATION SHEET(RETURN)CND 151 AE009351 J5X00401A INSTRUCTION BOOK(E) 152 AE009352 J5X00410A INSTRUCTION BOOK(F) 153 AE001213 800WB0A008 FIBER WASHER

201 AE005140 810A14080U SCREW WASHER(A) M4*8 CH 202 AE003528 8110630A0U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*10 CH 203 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH 204 AE007747 814623080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH 205 AE007748 810A13050U SCREW WASHER(A) M3*5 CH 206 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH 207 AE007202 810923053U SCREW TAP TITE(B) R BIND 3*5.3 CH 208 AE007749 811023080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BIND 3*8 CH 209 AE005832 8110630A2U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*12 CH

210 AE007353 8117540A2U SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*12 CH 211 AE006421 816323068U SCREW TAP TITE(B)-R BIND WASHER8 3*6.8CH 212 AE005987 810723060U SCREW TAP TITE(S) BIND 3*6 CH

K1-2

Page 97

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! 600 AE009353 A5X002B650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A5X002B650

601 AE008499 92SBB0033A LOADER SUB ASS'Y DLM1D29-31 602 AE005815 92AAA0017A FEED RACK ASS'Y 603 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR 604 AE005805 92P100117A GEAR,MIDDLE 605 AE008500 92P200017A INSULATOR, F 606 AE008501 92P200018A INSULATOR, R 607 AE005816 92P100116A GEAR,FEED 608 BZ710149 800WFAA008 CUSHION C

701 AE005817 92P700007A SCREW,GEAR FEED 702 AE003554 814011723U SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH 703 AE003555 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH 704 AE005006 813381750U SCREW,T-TITE(B)CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH 705 AE003557 811022080U SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH

CD2001 AE008502 122J4O1603 CORD JUMPER 127000-2933 CD2301 AE003558 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102 ! M2602 AE005821 1515S98004 MOTOR BCZ3B05 PCB640 AE008503 A5X002C640 SW PCB ASS'Y DED020A SW2 AE001158 0500101036 PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH22

K2-1

Page 98

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! R3805 BZ210191 R3X28B010J R,METAL OXIDE 1 OHM 3W

C339 AE006603 E61FF3102D CE 1000 UF 25V C3805 AE008429 E61FF2102D CE 1000 UF 16V

D102 AE004795 DE7RB5R62B DIODE ZENER UDZS5.6B TE-17 D103 AE004795 DE7RB5R62B DIODE ZENER UDZS5.6B TE-17 D106 AE007801 DD7R20S300 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER RB520S-30-TE61 D107 AE007801 DD7R20S300 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER RB520S-30-TE61 D108 AE007801 DD7R20S300 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER RB520S-30-TE61 D201 AE007801 DD7R20S300 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER RB520S-30-TE61 D202 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D301 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D2202 AE000288 0021E9Q010 LED LTL-1BEFJ-002A D2303 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D2304 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D3001 AE008321 DD7RB051L0 DIODE SCHOTTKY RB051L-40_TE25 D3002 AE008321 DD7RB051L0 DIODE SCHOTTKY RB051L-40_TE25 D3003 AE008321 DD7RB051L0 DIODE SCHOTTKY RB051L-40_TE25 D3206 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L D3207 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L D3801 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3802 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3803 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L D3804 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L D3805 AE006060 D28T0ERB20 DIODE RECTIFIER 10ERB20-TA1B2 D3806 AE007801 DD7R20S300 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER RB520S-30-TE61 D3808 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D3809 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3810 BZ410067 D97U02R21B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ2.2B T-77 D4002 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D4003 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D4005 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D4008 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D7001 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D7002 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D7003 AE008428 DD7PN202U0 DIODE SILICON DAN202UT106 D7004 AE008428 DD7PN202U0 DIODE SILICON DAN202UT106 D7005 AE008428 DD7PN202U0 DIODE SILICON DAN202UT106 D7006 AE008428 DD7PN202U0 DIODE SILICON DAN202UT106 D8509 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D8510 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

IC101 AE008733 I56F07148A IC OEC7148A IC102 79097849 I9UF032290 IC PST3229NR IC199 AE009342 S5X002BE02 MEMORY DATA AT24C256N-10SU-2.7 IC301 AD301983 I01FF58910 IC AN5891SA-E1V ! IC302 AE008430 I03SP20520 IC LA42052-E IC303 AE002504 I0QF0580V0 IC NJM4580V(TE1) IC801 AE008436 I56K05A710 IC R8A66605A71FP IC901 AE004647 I01FF58320 IC AN5832SA-E1V ! IC2301 AE008194 I03FV65650 IC LA6565VR-TLM-E ! IC3001 AE004650 I07F097430 IC BA9743AFV-E2 ! IC3002 AE006395 I0GF91ZPH0 IC PQ070XZ01ZPH ! IC3003 AE004653 I1KF98D050 IC KIA78D05F ! IC3201 AE007825 I07F0C0WF0 IC BA00BC0WFP-E2 ! IC3202 AE008431 I07F078200 IC BD7820FP-E2 ! IC3801 AE008435 I1LF010150 IC AL1015 ! IC3802 AE008435 I1LF010150 IC AL1015 ! IC3805 AE007827 I0GA9090R0 IC PQ090RDA1SZH IC3806 AE008434 I1KF9D33P0 IC KIA78D33PI ! IC3807 AE004648 I03D979950 IC LA7995M-TLM ! IC3808 AE008432 I07F90WTP0 IC BA00BC0WT-V5 IC3809 79097849 I9UF032290 IC PST3229NR IC4001 AE008196 ICQK068821 IC ZR36882ELCG IC4005 AE008377 IG2J081657 IC EM638165TS-7G IC4007 AE009343 S5X002BF02 MEMORY DATA SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE IC4201 AE002728 I01F05853B IC AN15853B-E1 IC4301 AE001295 I0QJ045800 IC NJM4580M(TE1) IC7001 AE008433 I1GF0TH300 IC TH30 IC7201 AE008438 IF8F0385A0 IC ICSV385AGLFT IC8502 AE003584 I17F017530 IC PCM1753DBQR

Q201 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q202 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

RESISTORS

CAPACITORS

DIODES

ICS

TRANSISTORS

K3-1

Page 99

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

TSB P/N Ref

ocationNo.

Q203 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q204 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK Q205 BZ510092 TPAAD05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA104SRTK Q206 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q207 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q208 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q301 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q302 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q303 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q304 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q305 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q306 BZ510107 TPAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA101SRTK Q2301 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P Q2302 AE008331 TAAA1544T0 TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1544T-RTK/P Q2303 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q2304 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q2305 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3001 AE008441 TAAA01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y-RTF/P Q3002 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q3003 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3004 BZ510112 T67J1036K0 TRANSISTOR SILICON 2SA1036KT146 Q3005 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3006 BZ510112 T67J1036K0 TRANSISTOR SILICON 2SA1036KT146 ! Q3007 AE004663 TJ5M081090 FET TPC8109(T2LORION_Q) ! Q3008 AE004663 TJ5M081090 FET TPC8109(T2LORION_Q) Q3801 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK Q3802 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q3803 BZ510057 TAAT01281Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1281_Y Q3805 AE007842 TJ7M50P030 FET RSS050P03_TB Q3808 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q3809 AE007842 TJ7M50P030 FET RSS050P03_TB Q4201 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4202 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4203 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4204 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4205 BZ510113 T27T030180 FET 2SK3018T106 Q4206 BZ510113 T27T030180 FET 2SK3018T106 Q4301 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4302 BZ510088 TNAAD05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC104SRTK Q4303 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4304 BZ510107 TPAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA101SRTK Q4305 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK Q7001 AE008442 TK2MS46850 FET FDS4685 Q7002 AE008443 TK2MS84490 FET FDS8449 Q7003 AE008442 TK2MS46850 FET FDS4685 Q7004 AE008443 TK2MS84490 FET FDS8449 Q7005 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

L001 AD300613 02167F150J COIL 15 UH L002 BZ310041 02167F101J COIL 100 UH L003 AE008393 021JX6120K COIL 12 UH L301 BZ310041 02167F101J COIL 100 UH L303 BZ310181 02A6B2E0A1 CORE,FERRITE HF70T22*10*14 L901 BZ310041 02167F101J COIL 100 UH L2204 BZ310181 02A6B2E0A1 CORE,FERRITE HF70T22*10*14 L3001 AE004593 021404101L COIL 100 UH L3002 AE004593 021404101L COIL 100 UH L3003 BZ310191 02167F2R2J COIL 2.2 UH L3004 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH L3801 AD301785 02167E100K COIL 10 UH L3802 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH L3803 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH L3804 AE004594 021404150M COIL 15 UH L3805 AE007757 021404470M COIL 47 UH L4201 BZ310041 02167F101J COIL 100 UH L4202 BZ310040 02167F470J COIL 47 UH L4203 BZ310040 02167F470J COIL 47 UH L4206 BZ310040 02167F470J COIL 47 UH L4207 BZ310040 02167F470J COIL 47 UH L4401 BZ310183 021LA6220J COIL 22 UH L4402 BZ310183 021LA6220J COIL 22 UH L7001 AE008396 02DN000088 COIL CHOKE CRT-058 L7002 AE008396 02DN000088 COIL CHOKE CRT-058 L7003 BZ310118 02AHB9A972 CORE,FERRITE W5T29X7.5X19 L7201 AE005285 0216S8470K COIL 47 UH

erenceNo.

TRANSISTORS

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

escription

K3-2

Page 100

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

TSB P/N Ref

ocationNo.

L7202 AE005285 0216S8470K COIL 47 UH L7203 AE005285 0216S8470K COIL 47 UH L8502 AE000828 02167F1R0K COIL 1 UH L8503 AE000828 02167F1R0K COIL 1 UH T7001 AE008397 048110002H TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING CRT-057 T7002 AE008397 048110002H TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING CRT-057 T7003 AE008397 048110002H TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING CRT-057 T7004 AE008397 048110002H TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING CRT-057 ! T7005 AE004604 045532001H TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING AW-HA284T ! T7006 AE004604 045532001H TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING AW-HA284T

! J3801 AE007899 060J602007 JACK DC DC-487AG-PBT2.0-5.5A J4201 AE008401 060K431024 RCA JACK AV6-57A03-03H J4202 AE008402 060R401122 RCA JACK RCA-117-01 ! J4401 AE003431 060J131016 HEADPHONE JACK MSJ-2000_AG J4402 AE004761 063D700010 JACK MDC-012V1-A_LF J4403 AE008398 060K421056 RCA JACK AV-5A-66H J4404 AE008400 060K421058 RCA JACK AV-5A-68H J4405 AE008399 060K421057 RCA JACK AV-5A-67H

SW2201 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2202 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2203 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2204 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2205 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2251 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2252 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2253 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2254 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2255 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

PCB130 AE009344 A5X004B130 DVD MT PCB ASS'Y DMF066A PCB270 AE008420 A5X002B270 OPERATION PCB ASS'Y CEF175B PCB280 AE008421 A5X002B280 OPERATION 2 PCB ASS'Y DEF092A PCB350 AE008422 A5X002B350 BACK LIGHT PCB ASS'Y CEF181A PCBD20 AE008423 A5X002BD20 AV PCB ASS'Y CMF082B PCBD90 AE008424 A5X002BD90 SIDE JACK PCB ASS'Y CEF177B PCBDA0 AE008425 A5X002BDA0 REMOCON PCB ASS'Y CEF176B PCBDS0 AE009345 A5X004BDS0 SCALER PCB ASS'Y CEF174A

! AD001 AE007897 0411030096 AC,ADAPTER 11030096 B801 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B802 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B803 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B804 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B2301 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B2302 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B2304 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B2305 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B3001 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D B3202 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3203 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3204 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3205 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3206 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3801 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3802 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3804 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3805 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D B3806 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3807 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3808 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B4001 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4002 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4003 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4004 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4005 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4006 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4007 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4008 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4009 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4010 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4011 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4012 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4013 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

erenceNo.

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

JACKS

SWITCHES

P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES

MISCELLANEOUS

escription

K3-3

Toshiba 15DLV77C Service Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual